AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 13 Ecological Adaptation, Succession and Ecological Services

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material 13th Lesson Ecological Adaptation, Succession and Ecological Services Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material 13th Lesson Ecological Adaptation, Succession and Ecological Services

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
The climax stage is achieved quickly in secondary succession as compared to primary succession. Why?
Answer:
In secondary succession, the species that Invade depend on the condition of the soil, availability of water, the environment and also the seeds or other propagules present. Since soil is already there, the rate of succession is much faster and hence climax stage is also reached more quickly than primary succession.

Question 2.
Among Bryophytes, lichens, and ferns which one is a pioneer species in a xeric succession?
Answer:
Among Bryophytes, lichens, and Ferns, lichens are the pioneer species in a xeric succession.

Question 3.
Give any two examples of xerarch succession.
Answer:
Crustose lichens – Rhizocarpon, Lecanora.
Foliose lichens – Parmelia, Dermetocarpon.
Mossess – Funaria

Question 4.
Name the type of land plants that can tolerate the salinities of the sea.
Answer:
Halophytes.
Ex : Rhizophora.

Question 5.
Define Heliophytes and Sciophytes. Name a plant from your locality that i$ either Heliophyte or Sciophyte.
Answer:
Plants grow in direct sunlight are called heliophytes.
Ex : Tridax, grass.

Plants grow in shady places are called Sciophytes.
Ex : Ferns, Mosses.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 13 Ecological Adaptation, Succession and Ecological Services

Question 6.
Define population and community.
Answer:
A group of similar individuals belonging to the same species found in an area is called population. An assemblage of all the populations belonging to different species occuring in an area is called community.

Question 7.
Define communities? Who classified plant communities into hydrophytes, meso- phytes and xerophytes?
Answer:
An assemblage of all the populations belonging to different species occuring in an area are called communities. “Eugene Warming” classified plant communities into Hydrophytes, mesophytes and xerophytes.

Question 8.
Hydrophytes show reduced xylem. Why?
Answer:
All submerged organs are capable of absorbing water that’s why Hydrophytes show reduced xylem.

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What are hydrophytes? Briefly discuss the different kinds of hydrophytes with example.
Answer:
Hydrophytes are the plants which grow in water or in very wet places. According to their relation to water and air hydrophytes are classified into five categories. They are

1. Free floating Hydrophytes :
They float freely on the surface of the water and have no contact with soil.
E.g. : Pistia, Eichhornia, Wolffia, Salvinia, Azolla.

2. Rooted hydrophytes with floating leaves :
They are attached to the muddy soil by roots. Their leaves have long petioles which keep them floating on the surface of water.
E.g. : Nymphaea, Nelumbo and Victoria regia.

3. Submerged suspended hydrophytes :
They are completely submerged and suspended in water, but not rooted in the mud and have no contact with air.
E.g. : Hydrilla, Ceratophyllum, Utricularia and Najas.

4. Submerged rooted hydrophytes :
These plants are completely submerged in water. They are attached to the muddy soil by roots.
E.g. : Vallisneria, Potamogeton etc.

5. Amphibious plants :
These live partly in water and partly in air.
E.g. : Sagittaria, Ranunculus, Limnophila.

Some amphibious plants grow around water bodies, with water touching them. They will survive in dry periods also.
E.g. : Typha, Cyperus etc.
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 13 Ecological Adaptation, Succession and Ecological Services 1

Question 2.
Enumerate the morphological adaptations of hydrophytes,
Answer:

  1. Roots may be absent or poorly developed. In some plants (Salvinia) submerged leaves compensate for roots.
  2. Root caps are usually absent. In some amphibious plants which grow in mud, roots are well developed with root caps. In some plants root caps are replaced by root pockets.
    E.g. : Eichhornia.
  3. Roots if present, are generally fibrous, reduced in length, uribranched or poorly branched.
  4. Stem is long, slender and flexible.
  5. Leaves are thin and either long and ribbon shaped (vallisnaria) or long and linear {potamogeton) or finely dissected (caratophyllum).
  6. Floating leaves are large and flat with their upper surfaces coated with wax (Nymphaea, Nelumbium).

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 13 Ecological Adaptation, Succession and Ecological Services

Question 3.
List out the anatomical adaptations of hydrophytes.
Answer:

  1. Cuticle is totally absent in the submerged parts of the plants. It may be present in the form of a thin film on the surface of parts exposed to atmosphere.
  2. The epidermis is composed of thin walled cells. They perform absorption and assimilation as all cells contain chloroplasts.
  3. Stomata are totally absent in submerged hydrophytes as the gaseous exchange takes place by diffusion.
  4. In Nymphaea, Nelumbium, the leaves are epistomatous.
  5. All Hydrophytes contain aerenchyma that helps in gaseous exchange and buoyancy.
  6. Mechanical tissues like Collenchyma and Sclerenchyma are poorly developed.
  7. Xylem is poorly developed.
  8. Secondary growth is absent

Question 4.
Write a brief account on classification of xerophytes.
Answer:
On the basis of their Drought resisting Capacity, Xerophytes are generally classified into the following three categories.
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 13 Ecological Adaptation, Succession and Ecological Services 2

1. Ephemerals :
They are called “drought evaders” or “drought escapers”. They are annuals which complete their life cycle with in a period of 6-8 weeks. They are found in dry zones, e.g. : Tribulus, chenopodium.

2. Succulents :
These are called “drought avoiding plants”. They are fleshy due to storage of water in the form of mucilage. The stored water is sparingly utilised during dry periods.
Examples :
a) Stem succulents : Opuntia, Euphorbia.
b) Leaf succulents : Bryophyllum, Aloe, Agave etc.
c) Root succulents : Asparagus, Ceiba.

Non-succulents :
They are called true xerophytes. These are perennial plants which can withstand prolonged period of drought.
E.g. : Casuarina, Nerium, Ziziphus, Calotropis, Acacia, etc. .

Question 5.
Enumerate the morphological adaptations of xerophytes.
Answer:

  1. Roots are long with extensive branching spread over wide areas.
  2. Root hairs and root caps are very well developed.
  3. Mostly the stem is stunted, woody, hard and covered with thick bark.
  4. Stems are usually covered by hairs or waxy coatings.
  5. Leaves are very much reduced to small, scale like and sometimes modified into spines to reduce the rate of transpiration.
  6. Certain Xerophytes shed their leaves during the dry period.
    Ex : Capparis.

Question 6.
Give in detail the anatomical adaptations shown by xerophytes.
Answer:

  1. Epidermis is covered with thick cuticle to reduce the rate of transpiration.
  2. Epidermal cells may have silica crystals.
  3. Epidermis may be multilayered as in leaves of Nerium.
  4. Stomata are generally confined to lower epidermis of leaves called hypostomatous. They are present in pits called sunken stomata.
  5. Hypodermis is parenchymatous to check evaporation of water.
    Ex : Calotropis.
  6. Mechanical tissues are very well developed.
  7. Vascular tissues are very well developed.

Question 7.
Define plant succession. Differentiate primary and secondary successions.
Answer:
The gradual and fairly predictable change in the species composition of a given area is called plant succession.

Differences :

Primary successionSecondary succession
1. It occurs on a primary bare area or reservoir.1. It occurs in areas where mutual biotic communities have been destroyed such as in abandoned form lands, burned forests.
2. It occurs in Biologically sterile area.2. It occurs in biologically fertile area.
3. It takes a long time to reach the climax stage.3. It is quite rapid to reach climax stage because of presence of soil.

Question 8.
Define ecosystem/ecological services. Explain in brief with regard to pollination.
Answer:
The processes by which the environment produces resources that we often take for granted such as cleen water, timber and habitat for fisheries and pollination of native and agricultural plants is called Ecosystem /Ecological services.

The transfer of pollengrains to fertilize the ovaries of flowers is called pollination. It is an essential part of a healthy ecosystem. Most flowering plants require pollinators to produce fruits and seeds. So pollinators play a significant role in the production of more food crops in the world. Declines of pollinator activity could have serious economic repercussions throughout the world.

The most important pollinator for Agriculture is Honeybee. Over 1,00,000 invertebrate species such as bees, moths, butterflies, beetles and flies serve as pollinators worldwide. At least 1035 species of vertebrates including birds, mammals and reptiles also pollinate many plant species. Continued declines in pollinator activity could mean rising costs for pollinator dependent fruits and vegetables and the disruption of entire ecological systems.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 13 Ecological Adaptation, Succession and Ecological Services

Question 9.
Write about the measure to be taken to sustain ecological functions.
Answer:

  1. Choose products produced with methods that conserve resources, minimize waste and reduce or eliminate environmental damage.
  2. Prefer products made with methods that reduce the use of pesticides and artificial fertilizers.
  3. Reduce consumption and waste production.
  4. Support usage of renewable energy alternatives.
  5. Use public transit, cycle or walk to conserve natural resources and to reduce pollution and enjoy the health benefits.
  6. Participate in developing community garden and tree plantation programmes.
  7. Avoid the usage of pesticides and follow methods of natural pest control.
  8. Use native plants in the garden and provide habitat for wildlife.

Question 10.
What measure do you suggest to protect the pollinators?
Answer:

  1. Creating own pollinator friendly garden using a wide variety of native flowering plants.
  2. Reducing the use of pesticides used in and around your home.
  3. Encouraging local clubs or school groups to build artificial habiutats like butterfly gardens, bee boards and bee boxes.
  4. Supporting agriculture enterprises with pollinato-friendly practices to minimize pesticide use.
  5. Encouraging government agencies to take into account the full economic benefits of wild pollinators when formulating policies for agriculture and other land uses.
  6. To develop techniques for cultivating native pollinator species for crot pollination.

Long Answer Type Question

Question 1.
Give an account of ecosystem services with reference to carbon fixation and oxygen release.
Answer:
Trees are essential to carbon sequestration keeping excess carbon from entering the atmosphere. The main chemical flow between forest and atmosphere is the exchange of CO2 and O2. Forests provide a vast bank for CO2 and a large amount of CO2 is deposited in its timber. It plays an essential role in maintaining a dynamic balance between CO2 & O2 in atmosphere. According to photosynthesis equation 180 gm of Glucose and 193 gm O2 are produced by using 264 gm of CO2 and 108 gm of water and 677.2 K.cal. of solar energy.

180 gm of Glucose can be transformed to 162 gm of polysaccharide inside the plant. So whenever plant produces, 162 gm of dry organic matter 264 gm of CO2 will be fixed. Then the total amount of the dry organic matter of the reserve forests can be estimated. It provides a foundation for reckoning the total amount of CO2 fixation by the forests in the reserve.

Natural ecosystems may have helped to stabilize climate and prevent overheating of the earth by removing more of the greenhouse gas, CO2 from the atmosphere. Many countries have established a carbon tax system to reduce emissions of the greenhouse gases, especially to cut down CO2 and CO in atmosphere.

Ecosystem services – oxygen release :
Trees and plankton play a big role in release of oxygen; which depends on the species of tree, its age, its health, and also on the trees surroundings. “A mature leafy tree produces as much oxygen in a season as 10 peole in hale in a year”, or A single mature tree can absorb carbon dioxide at a rate of 48 Ibs/year and release enough oxygen back into the atmosphere to support 2 human beings.

One acre of trees annually consumes the amount of CO2 equivalent to that produced by driving an average can for 26,000 miles. That same acre of trees also produces enough oxygen for 18 people to breathe for a year.

Submerged macrophytes release O2 and enrich dissolved O2 in water. The plants and planktons are described as “the Lungs of the World”, taking billion of tonnes of CO2 and exhaling billions of tones of O2.

Micro organisms also contribute to the oxygen release in direct and indirect ways.

Ex : Cyanobacteria releases O2 in a direct way. The other supporting services include Nutrient cycling through decomposition of fallen Logs in forests, soil formation by bacteria and lichens.

Intext Questions

Question 1.
Categorise the following plants into hydrophytes halophytes, mesophytes and xerophytes and give reasons.
a) Salvinia b) Opuntia c) Rhizophora d) Mangifera
Answer:
a) Salvinia is a hydrophyte, It grows on the surface of water.
b) Opuntia is a xerophyte, grows in xeric (dry) areas.
c) Rhizophora is a Halophyte which tolerates the salinities of the sea.
d) Mangifera is a mesophyte, grows in habitats where water is neither scarce nor not abundant.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 13 Ecological Adaptation, Succession and Ecological Services

Question 2.
In a pond, we see plants which are free-floating ; rooted-submerged; rooted emergent; rooted with floating leaves, write the type of plants against each of them.
Answer:

Plant nameType
a) HydrillaSubmerged suspendend Hydrophyte.
b) TyphaAmphibious plant.
c) NymphaeaRooted with floating leaves.
d) LemnaFree floating hydrophytes.
e) VallisnariaSubmerged, rooted hydrophyte.

Question 3.
Undertake the following a part of learning process.
a) Identify and assess ecological services found in your area.
b) Think of measures or means to sustain such ecological services.
c) Observe the type of plants or crops grown in your area.
d) Enumerate ecological servies of your area.
e) find out the ecological goods of natural forests commonly used in your area.
f) Observe the biotic agents of pollination for ornamental flowring plants and or agricultural crops in your locality.
Answer:
a) Ecological services :

  1. Purification of air and water.
  2. Detoxification and decomposition of water.

b) Measures to sustain Ecological services are

  1. Reduce consumption and waste production.
  2. Avoid the usage of pesticides.

c) Crops grown in our area are
a) Paddy b) Maize c) Black gram d) green gram e) Crotalaria (fodder) g) vegetables.

d) Ecological services :

  1. Purification of air and water.
  2. Mitigation of floods and droughts
  3. Decomposition of wastes

e) Ecological goods :
a) Clean air b) Fresh water c) Food d) fibre e) Timber f) Medicines.

f) Biotic agents of pollination
a) Insects b) Birds c) Animals (Bats, Snails, Snakes).

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 10 Biomolecules

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material 10th Lesson Biomolecules Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material 10th Lesson Biomolecules

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Medicines are either man-made (i.e., synthetic) or obtained from living organisms like plants, bacteria, animals etc. and hence the latter are called natural products. Sometimes natural products are chemically altered by man to reduce toxicity or side effects. Write against each of the following whether they were initially obtained as a natural product or as a synthetic chemical.
a) Pencillin_ b) Sulfonamide_ c) Vitamin C_ d) Growth Hormone_
Answer:
a) Penicillin – Natural
b) Sulfonamide – Synthetic
c) Vitamin C – Natural
d) Growth Hormone – Natural.

Question 2.
Select an appropriate chemical bond among ester bond, glycosidic bond, peptide bond and hydrogen bond and write against each of the following.
a) Polysaccharide b) Protein c) Fat d) Water
Answer:
a) Polysacharide – Glycosidic Bond
b) Protein – Peptide Bond
c) Fat – Ester Bond
d) Water – Hydrogen Bond.

Question 3.
Give one example for each of aminoacids, sugars, nucleotides and fatty acids.
Answer:
Aminoacids – Glycine, Alanine
Sugars – Cellulose [Glucose, Ribose)
Nucleotides – “Adenylic acid”
Fatty acids – Lecithin.

Question 4.
Explain the Zwitterionic form of an amino acid.
Answer:
At a specific PH the amino acid carries both the +ve and -ve charges in equal number and exists as dipolar ion. It is also called as zwitterionic form. At his point, the net charge on it is zero.

Question 5.
What constituents of DNA are linked by glylosidic bond?
Answer:
Individual Monosacharides are linked by glycosidic bond.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 10 Biomolecules

Question 6.
Glycine and Alanine are different with respect to one substituent on the a cabron. What are the other common substituent groups?
Answer:
Hydrogen, Carboxyl group, amino group and a variable group designated as R group.

Question 7.
Starch, Cellulose, Glycogen, Chitin are polysaccharides found among the following. Choose the one appropriate and write against each.
a) Cotton fibre_ b) Exoskeleton of cockroach_ c) Liver_ d) Peeled potato_
Answer:
a) Cotton fibre – Cellulose
b) Exoskeleton of cockroach – Chitin
c) Liver – Glycogen
d) Peeled Potato – Starch.

Question 8.
What are primary and secondary metabolites? Give examples.
Answer:
Primary metabolites :
The metabolites have identifiable functions and play known roles in normal physiological processes are called as primary metabolites.
Ex : Hydrogen, Carbon, Oxygen, Nitrogen etc.

Secondary metabolites :
Metabolic products that do not have identifiable functions in the host organism are called as secondary metabolites.
Ex : Alkaloids, Flavonoids, Rubbers, Resins etc.

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Explain briefly the metabolic basis for ‘living’.
Anwer:
Metabolic pathways can lead to a more complex structure from a simpler structure. (Anabolic pathways). [For example lactic acid becomes cholesterol or sucrose formation from C02 and water in Mesophyll] or lead to a simple structure from a complex structure (catabolic pathways) [glucose becomes lactic acid in our skeletol muscle). Anabolic pathways consume energy whereas catabolic pathways lead to the release of energy.

For example when glucose is degraded to lactic acid in our skeletal muscle, energy is liberated called Glycolysis, Living organisms have learnt to trap this energy and store it in the form of chemical bonds. When ever requires, this energy is utilised for biosynthetic, osmotic and mechanical work that we perform. The most important form of energy currency in living systems is adenorine triphosphate (ATP).

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 10 Biomolecules

Question 2.
Schematically represent primary, secondary and tertiary structures of a hypothetical polymer using protein as an example.
Answer:
The sequence of amino acids, i.e., the positional information in a protein is called the primary structure of a protein. A protein is imagined as a line, the left end represented by the first amino acid called N- terminal amino acid and the right end represented by the last aminoacid called C-terminal aminoacid In proteins, only, right handed helics are observed. Other regions of the protein thread are folded into other forms in what is called the secondary structure. In addition, the long protein chain is also folded upon itself like a hollow woolen ball giving rise to the tertiary structure.
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 10 Biomolecules 1

Question 3.
Nucleic acids exhibits secondary structure. Justify with example.
Answer:
Nucleic acids exhibit a wide variety of seconary structure. For example, one of the secondary structures exhibited by DNA is Watson – Crick model. According to this, DNA exists as a double helix. The two stands of polynucleotides are antiparallel i.e., run in the opposite direction. The back bone is formed by the sugar-phosphate, sugar chain. The nitrogen bases are projected more or less perpendiular to this backbone but face inside. A combines with T by two hydrogen bonds where G combines with C by three hydrogen bonds. One full turn of the helical strand would involve ten base pairs. The length of one coil is 34 A and the distance between base pair is 3.4 A . This type of DNA is called B-DNA.
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 10 Biomolecules 2

Question 4.
Comment on the statement living sate is a non-equilibrium steady – state to be able to perform work1.
Answer:
Several chemical compounds are present in a living organism called metabolites or biomolecules are present at concentrations characteristic of each of them. For example the blood concentration of Glucose in a normal healthy individual is 4.5 – 5.0 mp. All living organisms exist in a steady state characterised by concentrations of each of these biomolecules. These are in a metabolic flux. Any chemical or physical process moves spontaneously to equilibrium, The steady state is a non equilibrium state. The systems cannot work at equilibrium. As living organisms work continuously, they cannot afford to reach equilibrium. Hence the living state is a non-equilibrium steady state to be able to perform work.

Question 5.
Is rubber a primary metabolite or a secondary metabolite ? Write four sentences about rubber.
Answer:
Rubber is a secondary metabolite. Rubber is an elastic hydro carbon polymer that was orginally derived from latex, d milky colloid produced-by some plants. The purified form of natural rubber is the chemical polyisoprene. It is used extensively in many products, as a synthetic rubber. It is normally very strechy and flexible and extremely waterproof.

Question 6.
Dynamic state of body constituents is a more realistic concept than the fixed concentrations of body constituents at any point of time. Elaborate.
Answer:
All the living organisms contains biomolecules in certain concentrations, which have a turn over. They are constantly being changed into some other biomolecules and also made from some other biomolecules. This breaking and making occurs through chemical reactions called metabolism. Each of the metabolic reactions results in the transformation of biomolecules.

Example :
Removal of CO2 from amino acids making into an amine removal of amino group in a nucleotide base. Majority of metabolic reactions do not occur in isolation but are linked to some other reactions. Metabolites are converted into each other by a series of linked reactions called metabolic pathways. Flow of metabolites through metabolic pathways has a definite rate and direction like auto¬mobile traffic. This metabolic flow is called the dynamic state of body constituents.

Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What are secondary metabolites? Enlist them indicating their usefulness to man.
Answer:
Metabolic products that do not have identifiable functions in the host organism are called secondary Metabolites. They are Alkaloids, Flavinoids, Rubber, Essential oils. Antibiotics, Coloured pigments, Scents, Gums and Spices.

Alkaloids :

  1. Alkaloids from plant extracts have been used as ingredients in lotions (liquid medicine) and poisons.
  2. Ancient people used plant extracts containing alkaloids for treating a large number of ailments including snake bite, fever and insanity.

Flavinoids :
These are a widely distributed group of polyphenolic compounds with health related properties which include anticancer, antiviral, anti inflamatory activities, effects on capillary fregility and can ability to inhibit human platelet aggregation.

Rubber :

  1. Uncured rubber is used for cements for adhesive, insulating and friction tapes. The flexibility of rubber is dften used in hose, tires and rollers for a wide variety of devices.
  2. Its elasticity makes it suitable for various kinds of shock absorbers.
  3. It is impermeable to gases, it is useful in the manufacture of articles such as air hoses, balloons, bulls and cushions.

Essential oils :

  1. An essential oil is a concentrated hydrophobic liquid containing volatile aroma compounds from plants.
  2. These are also known as volatile oils, etheral oils or aetherolea. These are used in aromatherapy.

Antibiotics :

  1. Antibiotics are defined as chemicals of natural organic origin that will till certain harmful pathogens.
  2. They should not be toxic or have side effects to the host.
  3. An antibiotic is a substance that harms or destroys the bacteria that cause infection and disease. We take antibiotics to fight bacterial infections.

Spices :

  1. Asafoetida is a good remedy for whooping cough and stomach ache caused due to gas.
  2. Cardamon (elachi) helps to control bad breath and digestive disorder.

Question 2.
What are the processes used to analyse elemental composition, organic constituents and inorganic constituents of living tissue? What are the inferences on the most abundant constituents of living tissue? Support the inferences with appropriate data.
Answer:
Take a living tissue (a vegetable or a piece of liver) and grind it in trichloroacetic acid with the help of Mortar and pestle. The thick slurry obtained was strained through a cheese cloth or cotton, two fractions are formed. The first one is filtrate or acid soluble pool which consists of thousands of organic compounds and the second one is retentate or acid insoluble fraction. All the carbon compounds that we get from living tissues can be called biomolecules.

Weigh a small amount of living tissue and dry it. After the evaporation of water the material is burnt to oxidise all the carbon compounds. The remaining ash contains inorganic elements like sodium, potassium, calcium and magnesium and inorganic compounds like sulphate, phosphate etc., therefore chemical analysis gives elemental composition of living tissues in the form of hydrogen, oxygen, chlorine, carbon etc. From a biological point of view the organic constituents are classified into amino acids, nucleotide bases, fatty acids etc.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 10 Biomolecules

Question 3.
Nucleic acids exhibit secondary structure. Describe through Watson – Crick Model.
Answer:
Nucleic acids exhibit a wide variety of secondary structure. For example, one of the secondary structures exhibited by DNA is Watson – Crick model. According to this, DNA exists as a double helix. The two stands of polynucleotides are antiparallel i.e., run in the opposite direction. The back bone is formed by the sugar-phosphate, sugar chain. The nitrogen bases are projected more or less perpendiular to this backbone but face inside. A combines with T by two hydrogen bonds where G combines with C by three hydrogen bonds. One full turn of the helical strand would involve ten base pairs. The length of one coil is 34 A° and the distance between base pair is 3.4 A°. This type of DNA is called B-DNA.
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 10 Biomolecules 2

Question 4.
What is the difference between a nucleotide and nucleoside? Give two examples of each with their structure.
Answer:
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 10 Biomolecules 3

Question 5.
Describe various forms of lipid using a few examples.
Answer:
Lipids are orgnaic compounds which are insoluble in water. They are fats and fatty acids, oils, triglycerides, phospholipids, steroids, waxes etc.,
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 10 Biomolecules 4

Fattyacids :
They have a carboxyl group attahed to an R group. The R group could be a methyl or ehtyl or higher number of CH2 groups. For example pulmitic acid has 16 carbons including arboxyl carbon. Fatty acids could be saturated or unsaturated.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 10 Biomolecules 5
Glycolipids :
They are composed mainly of mono-di and trisubstituted Glycerols, the most well-known being the fatty acid esters of Glycerol called Triglycerides. In these compounds, the three hydroxyl groups of Glycerol are each esterified usually by different fatty acids. They function as a food store.

Phospholipids :
Some lipids have phophorous and phsophorylated organic compound in them called phospholipids. They are found in cell membrane.
Ex : Lecithin.
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 10 Biomolecules 6

Intext Questions

Question 1.
What are macromolecules? Give examples.
Answer:
Acid Insoluble, high molecular weight substances of the living tissue are called macromolecules or Biomacromolecules.
Ex : Polysacharides, Polypeptides, Nucleic acid.

Question 2.
Illustrate a glycosidic, peptide and a phospho-diester bond.
Answer:
Glycosidic Bond :
Bond involving carbons of adjacent sugar molecules.

Peptide bond :
Bond between aminoacids in a protein.

Phosphodiester bond :
The bond between the phosphate and hydroxyl group of sugar is called ester bond.

The ester bond an either side of phosphate is called phosphodjester bond.

Question 3.
What is meant by tertiary structure of proteins?
Answer:
3 Dimensional view of a protein essential for many biological activities is called Tertiary structure of proteins.

Question 4.
Find and write down structures of 10 interesting small molecular weight bio-molecules. Find if there is any industry, which manufactures the compounds by isolation. Find out who are the buyers.
Answer:
Aminoacids, Monosacharide and disacharide sugars, fatty acids, Glycerol, Nucleotides, Nucleosides, nitrogen bases are the biomolecules which have low molecular weight.

Question 5.
Proteins have primary sturcture. If you are given a method to known which aminoacid is at either of the two termini (ends) of a protein, can you connect this information to purity or homogeneity of a protein?
Answer:
Proteins are the polymers of a-amino acids. The linear sephence of amino acid is called primary structure. Most of proteins starts with an amino acids called Methionine but they are not homologous. Hence, the detection of N termeni (Or) C-termeni amino acid is not give information of homogeneity of a protein.

Question 6.
Find out and make a list of proteins used as therapeutic agents. Find other applications of proteins (eg. Cosmotics etc.,)
Answer:
Erythroproteins, Monoclenal Antibodies. Interferons thrombin and fibrinogen. Insulin, Renin, Proteins are also commonly used in the manufacture of cosmotics, toxins and as biological buffers.

Question 7.
Explain the composition of triglyceride.
Answer:
Triglycerides consist entirely of just three elements, carbon, Hydrogen and oxygen. The molecules of life all have carbon ‘back bones’ meaning the basic shape of the molecule comes from of connected carbon atoms. There are many hydrogen atoms connected to the carbon backbone of a molecule of life. Each triglyceride contains a small amount of O2.

Triglycerides have four basic parts, one glycerol molecule and three fatty acids. A glycerol is a three carbon molecule the fatty acids are long chains of carbon and hydrogen with two oxygen atoms at one end to produce a Triglyceride.

Question 8.
Can you describe what happens when milk is converted into curd or yoghurt based on your understanding of proteins.
Answer:
Proteins are macromolecules formed by the polymerization of amino acids. Structurally proteins are of 4 types.

  1. Primary
  2. Secondary
  3. Tertiary
  4. quaternary.

Structure :
More than are polyreptide chains assemble to form the quaternary structure. When milk is converted to curd, these complex proteins get denatured, thus converting globuler proteins into fibrous proteins. Therefore by the process of denaturation, the secondary and tertiary structures of proteins are destroyed.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 10 Biomolecules

Question 9.
Draw the sturcture of the amino acid, alanine.
Answer:
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 10 Biomolecules 7

Question 10.
What are gums made of? Is Fevicol different?
Answer:
Gums are hetero polysacharides. They are made from two or more different types of mono sacharides. On the other hand, Fevicol is polyvinyl alcohol (PVA) glue. It is not a polysacharide.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 9 Cell: The Unit of Life

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material 9th Lesson Cell: The Unit of Life Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material 9th Lesson Cell: The Unit of Life

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What is the significance of vacuole in a plant cell?
Answer:
In plnats, vacuole contains sap mainly composed of water, metabolic byproducts, excretions and other waste materials. They also play an important role in osmoregulation.

Question 2.
What does ‘s’ refer to a 70s and 80s ribosome?
Answer:
In both 70 ‘s’ ribosomes, and 80 ‘S’ ribosomes, ‘s’ stands for the sedimentation coefficient, [expressed in Svedberg unit]. It is indirectly a measure of density and size.

Question 3.
Mention a single membrane bound organelle which is rich in hydrolytic enzymes.
Answer:
Lysosome.

Question 4.
What are gas vacuoles 7 State their functions.
Answer:
Gas vacuoles are the aggregates of a number of small hollow cylindrical vesicles present in the cytoplasm of the floating purple and green photosynthetic bacteria. They are peroneable to atmospheric gases and help the bacteria to help floating on the surface of water.

Question 5.
What is the function of a polysome?
Answer:
Several ribosomes may attach to a single m-RNA and form a chain called polyribosomes or polysome. The ribosomes of a polysome translate the m-RNA into proteins.

Question 6.
What is the feature of a metacentric chromosome?
Answer:
The metacentric chromosome has middle centromere forming two equal arms of the chromosome.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 9 Cell: The Unit of Life

Question 7.
What is refered to as satellite chromosome?
Answer:
A few chromosomes have non-staining secondary constrictions at a constant location, which gives the appearence of a small fragment called satellite. The chromosome with satellite is called satellite chromosome.

Question 8.
What are microbodies? What do they contain?
Answer:
Peroxysomes and glyoxisomes are called Microbodies. Peroxysomes are involved in the convertion of fatty acids into carbohydrates and in photorespiration. Glyoxysomes contain the enzymes of glyoxylatic cycle which convert stored lipids to carbohydrates.

Question 9.
What is middle lamella made of? What is its functional significance?
Answer:
Middle lamella is mainly composed of calcium pectate and holds or glues the different . neighbouring cells together.

Question 10.
What is osmosis?
Answer:
Movement of molecules or ions or water from low concentrated place to high concentrated place through semi permeable membrane is called osmosis.

Question 11.
Which part of the Bacterial cell is targeted in gram staining?
Answer:
Chemical composition of the cell envelope.

Question 12.
Which of the following is not correct? a) Robert Brown discovered the Cell. b) Schleden and Schwann formulated the cell theory c) Virchow explained that cells ae formed from pre existing cells d) Aunicellular organism carries out its lofe activities with in a single cell.
Answer:
a) is not correct. The cell was discovered by “Robert Hooke”.
b) is correct.
c) is correct.
d) is correct.

Question 13.
New cells generate from a) Bacterical Fermentation b) regeneration of old cells c) Pre existing cells d) Abiotic materials.
Answer:
Pre existing cells.

Question 14.
Match the following :

a) Cristaei) Flat membranous sacs in stroma
b) Cisternaeii) infoldings in mitochondria
c) Thylakoidsiii) Disc shaped sacs in Golgi apparatus.

Answer:

a) Cristaeii) Infoldings in Mitochondria
b) Cisternaeiii) Disc shaped sacs in Golgi apparatus
c) Thylakoidsi) Flat membranous sacs in stroma

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 9 Cell: The Unit of Life

Question 15.
Which of the following is correct : a) Cells of all living organisms have a nucleus b) Both animals and plant cells have a well defined cell wall, c) In Prokaryotes, there are no membrane bound organcells. d) Cells are formed de novo from abiotic materials.
Answer:
“C” is correct. In Prokaryotes, there are no membrane bound organelles like chloroplast. Mitochondria, ER of Golgi complex.

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Describe the cell organelle which contains chlorophyll Pitments.
Answer:
The chlorophyll containing cell organelle is chloroplast. They are found in mesophyll cells of the leaves. They are lens shaped, oval, spherical or discoid or ribbon shaped, having 5 – 10 pm length and 2 – 4 pm width. They varies in number from one (chlamydomonus) to 20 – 40 per cell in the masophyll.

Each chloroplast is a double membrane bound structure with periplastidial space in between them. Inner to Inner membrane fluid filled space is present called the stroma. A number of organised flattened membranous sacs called the thylakoids are present in the stroma, which are arranged like a pile of coins called grana. The grana are inter connected by flat membranous tubules called stroma lamellae.

The stroma of the chlorplast contains enzymes required for the synthe is of carbohydrates proteins, small circular double stranded DNA molecules and 70s Ribosomes, photosynthetic pigments are present in thylakoids, involve in high reaction of photosynthesis.

Question 2.
Describe the structure and function of celi organelle that can be considered as power house of the cell.
Answer:
Mitochondria is considered as power house of the cell.

Each mitochondria is sausage shaped or cylindrical having a diameter of 0.2 to 1.0 µm and length of 1.0 to 4.1 µm. Mitochondria is a double membrane bound cell organelle of which outer membrane is smooth and inner membrane forms a number of infoldings towards inside called the cristae.

The space inner to inner membrane is fluid filled called matrix. The cristae contains several stalked particles called oxysomes or elementary particles. Mitochondria are the sites of aerobic respiration. They produce cellular energy in the form of ATP hence they are called power house of the cell. The matrix also contains single circular DNA molecule, 80s RNA molecules and 70s Ribosomes.
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 9 Cell The Unit of Life 1

Question 3.
Describe the structure of nucleus.
Answer:
The cell organelle that controls all the metabolic activities of the cell is called nucleus. It was first described by Robert Brown in 1831. Each nucleus is a spherical ball like structure, consists of 4 parts. They are A) Nuclear membrane, B) Nucleoplasm, C) Chromatin material and D) Nucleolus.

A) Nuclear membrane :
Nucleus is covered by double layered lipoprotenous membrane with perinuclear space in between them. At certain places, Nuclear pores are present which acts as passages between nucleoplasm and the cyloplasm in both directions.

B) Nucleoplasm :
Inner to nuclear membrane, nucleoplasm in present. It consists of chromatin material, nucleolus and RNA molecules nucleoplasm is also called karyoplasm.

C) Chromation material:
Inter phase nucleus has a loose and indistinct network of nucleoprotein fibres called chromatin. It contains DNA and some basic proteins called histones some on histone proteins and also RNA. The chromation is furthur classified into Heterochromatin and Euchromatin of these, Euchromatin is delicate, less condensed and active.

D) Nucleolus :
It is a dense, spherical shaped structure present inside the nucleus. It plays an indirect role in protein synthesis by producing rib somes.

Functions :

  1. It controls the heriditary characterestics of an organism.
  2. It is responsible for the protein synthesis, cell division, growth and differentiation.
  3. It controls all the metabolic activities of the cell.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 9 Cell The Unit of Life 2

Question 4.
Comment on the cartwheel Structure of centriole.
Answer:
Centrosome is an organelle usually containing two cylindrical structure called centrioles. They are surrounded by amorphous pericentriolar materials. Both the centrioles in a centrosome lie perpendicular to each other in which each has an organisation like “cartwheel”. They are made up of nine evenly spaced peripheral fibrils of tubulin. Each of the peripheral fibril is a triplet. The adjacent triplets are also linked.

The central part of the centriole is also proteinaceous and called the ‘Hub’, which is connected with tubules of the peripheral triplets by radial spokes made of protein. The centrioles form the basal body of cilia and flagella and spindle fifres that give rise to spindle apparatus during cell division in animal cells.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 9 Cell: The Unit of Life

Question 5.
Briefly describe the cell theory.
Answer:
Schwann proposed the hypothesis that the bodies of animals and plants are composed of cells and products of cells. Schleiden, examined a large number of plants and observed that all plants are composed of different kinds of cells which form the tissues of the plant. Schleiden and Schwann together formulated cell theory. But this theory did not explain as to how new cells were formed. Rudolf virchow first explained that cells divided and new cells are formed from pre-existing cells. He modified the hypothesis of Schleiden and Schwann and give a definite shape to cell theofy- Which states that,

  1. all living organisms are composed of cells and products of cells
  2. all cells arise from the pre-existing cells.

Question 6.
Differentiate between Rough Endoplasmic Reticulum (RER) and Smooth Endoplasmic Reticulum (SER).
Answer:

Rough ERSmooth ER
i. Rough ER is studded with ribosomes.i. Smooth ER is not associated with ribosomes.
ii. These are mainly composed of cisternaeii. These ae mainly composed of tubules
iii. Generally associated with nuclear membrane.iii. Generally associated with plasma membrane.
iv. Main function is protein synthesis.iv. Main function is lipid synthesis.

Question 7.
Give the biochemical composition of plasma membrane. How are lipid molecules arranged in the membrane?
Answer:
Plasma membrane is made up of lipids that are arranged in fila. Later biochemical investigations clearly revealed that the cell membrane also posses protein and Carbohydrate. The lipids are arranged with in the membrane, with the polar (hydrophilic) head towards the outer sides and the tail (hydrophobic)towards the inner part. With in the lipids, proteins are classified into integral or peripheral proteins.

An improved model Nicholson (1972) widely accepted as “Fluid Mosaic Model”, According to this, the quasi fluid nature of lipid enables lateral movement of proteins within the overall bilayer.

Question 8.
What are plasmids? Describe their role in Bacteria.
Answer:
Plasmids are small circular DNA molecules outside the genomic DNA. The plasmid DNA conferms certain unique phenotypic characters to Bacteria i.e„ resistance to antibiotics, the plasmid DNA is used to monitor bacterial transformation with foreign DNA.

Question 9.
What are histones? What are their functions?
Answer:
Histones are the proteins closely associated with DNA molecules. They are responsible for structure of chromatin and play an important role in the regulation of gene expression. Five types of histone have been identified H1, H2A, H2B, H3and H4. The other 4 types of histones associate with DNA to form Nucleosomes. They plan an instrumental role in the regulation of many important biological process involving DNA such as transcription, DNA repair & cell cycle.

Question 10.
What is cytoskeleton? What functions is it involved in?
Answer:
An elaborate network of filamentous proteinaceous structures present in the cytoplasm is called cytoskeleton. Eukaryotic cells contain three major components of cytoskeleton, microfilaments, intermediate filaments and microtubules. Cytoskeleton is involved in mechanical support, maintanance of cell shape, cell motility, intracellular transport, signaling across the cell and Karyokinesis.

Question 11.
What is endomembrane system? What cell organelles are not included in it? Why?
Answer:
A group of cell organelles with coordinate functions is called endomembrane system. Mitochondria, chloroplast and peroxisomes are not associated with endomembrane system. Because their functions are not coordinated with the ER, Golgicomplx, lysosomes and vacuoles.

Question 12.
Distinguish between Active transport and Passive transport?
Answer:

Active transportPassive transport
1. Movement of molecules or ions across the plasma membrane by utilising ATP is called Active transport.1. Movement of molecules across the plasma membrane without utilising metabotic energy is called passive transport.
2. It is carried out against the concentration gradient.
Ex : uptake of salt by cells through solution pump.
2. It is carried out along the concentration gradient.
Ex: If the concentration of water is more outside the cell than inside, water will flow into the cell, called diffusion.

Question 13.
What are mesosomes? What do they help in?
Answer:
Extensions of the plasma membrane into the cell are called mesosomes. These extensions are in the form of vesicles, tubules and cisternae. They help in cell wall formation, DNA replication and its distribution to daughter cells, help in respiration, secretion processes to increase the surface area of the plasma membrane to absorb nutrients and enzymetic content.

Question 14.
What are nucleosomes? What are they made of?
Answer:
Under electron Microscope, chromation appears as “beads on string”. These beads are known as Nucleosomes. Atypical nucleosome contains 20,0 bp of DNA double helix wrapped around a core of histone octamer having two copies of each of four types of histone proteins viz H2A, H2B, H3 and H4. HI Histone lies outside the nucleosome core and seals the two turns of DNA by binding at the point where DNA enters and leaves the core. The DNA continues between two nucleosomes is called linker DNA.

Question 15.
How do neutral solutes move across the Plasma membrane? Can the polar molecules also move a cross it in the same way? If not then how are these transported across the membrane.
Answer:
Neutral solutes move a cross the plasma membrane by the process of simple diffusion along the concentration gradient i.e., from higher concentration to the lower concentration. Polar molecules can not pass through the non polar lipid bilayer. Beacuse they require a carriers protein of the membrane to facilitate their transport across the membrane.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 9 Cell: The Unit of Life

Question 16.
Name two cell organelles that are double membrane bound. What are the .characteristics of these two organelles. State their functions and draw labelled diagrams of both.
Answer:
Mitochondria and chloroplasts are double membrane found cell organelles. Mitochondria is a rod shaped cell organelle or sausage shaped or cylindrical having a diameter of 0.2 to 1.0 mµ and length of 1.0 to 4 mµ. They are the sites of aerobic respiration and produce cellular energy in the form of ATP hence they are called “Power houses of the cell”.

Chloroplasts are lens shaped, oval, spherical or ribbon like bodies having 5-10 mp length and 2.4 mµ width. They contain enzymes required for the synthesis of carbohydrates and proteins.
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 9 Cell The Unit of Life 1

Question 17.
What are the characteristics of a prokaryotic cell?
Answer:

  1. Nuclear envelope is absent. Cell shows a single circular, supercoiled naked DNA called nucleoid.
  2. Nucleous is absent.
  3. Endomembrane system is absent.
  4. Mitochondria, plastids, lysosomes, peroxisomes and cytoskeleton are absent.
  5. Respiratory enzymes are located in cell membrane.
  6. 70 s type of ribosomes are present.
  7. Cell is surrounded by a cell wall, made up of polysaccharides, lipids and proteins.
  8. Cells divide amitotically.

Question 18.
Cell is the basic unit of life. Discuss in brief.
Answer:
Schleiden explained a large number of plants and observed that all plants are composed Of different kinds of cells which form the tissues of the plant. All living organisms are composed of cells and products of cells. All cells arise from pre-existing cells. A cell is the basic unit of life. It is the smallest unit (or building block) of a living organism that is capable of life. Within cells, there are structures that work togehter to allow the cell to live. Some structures transport materials throughout the cell other structures make food and others release energy for the cell to use.

When you look at a green plant, there is a green chemical called chlorophyll. This chemical enables’ plants to use the sun’s energy to make food for themselves. This is found in the cell part called the chloroplast. The nucleus of plant cells is the control centre of the cells. It directs everything a cell’does. The cytoplasm’ is a fluid inside the cell and the cell parts float in it.

Question 19.
Both lysosomes and vacuoles are endomembrane structures, yet they differ in terms of their functions. Give a critical comment.
Answer:
Lysosomes are the membrane found vesicular structures, filled with hydrolytic enzymes capable of digesting proteins, lipids and nucleic acids. These enzymes are optimally active at the acidic pH. Under starvation, lysosomes digest cellular contents by releasing hydrylyzing enzymes and cause death of cells called acetolysis.

Vacuole is the membrane found space present in the cytoplasm, contains mainly water, metabolic bye products, excretions and other waste materials. In some plant cells, vacuolar sap contains some pigments like anthocyanin which impart colour to the plant part; The vacuole is covered by single membrane called Tonoplast. The tonoplast facilitates the transport of number of ions and other materials against concentration gradients, into the vacuole. Vacuoles play an important role in osmoregulation.

Question 20.
Briefly give the contributions of the following scientists in formulating the cell theory, a) Rudolf Virchow b) Schleiden and Schwann.
Answer:
a) Rudolf Virchow :
He first explained that cells divided and new cells are formed from pre existing cells (Orhnis cellula – e cellula). He modified the hypothesis of Schleiden and Schwann to give the cell theory a final shape cell theory states that all living organisms are composed of cells and porducts of cells. All cells arise from pre-existing cells.

b) Schleiden and Schwann :
In 1838, Mathias Schleiden, examined a large number of plants and observed that cell plants are composed of different kinds of cells which form the tissues of the plant. Theodoe Schwann (1839), a British Zoologist, studied different types of animal cells and reported that cells had a thin outer layer which is called plasma membrane. He also concluded, based on his studies ‘ on plant tissues, the presence of cell wall is a unique character of the plant cells. Based on this, Schwann proposed the hypothesis that the bodies of animals and plants are composed of cells and products of cells.

Question 21.
Is extra genomic DNA present in prokaryotes and eukaryotes? If yes, indicate their location in both the types of organisms.
Answer:
Yes, Extra genome DNA is present in prokaryotes and Eukaryotes. In Prokaryotes, extra genome DNA (plasmid) is present along with Nucleoid and floats freely with in the cytoplasm. In Eukaryotes well defined nucleus is present with specific number of chromosomes. But a extra genome DNA is present in cell organelles like Mitochondria and chloroplast. These two organelles are believed to have originally been independent prokaryotes.

Question 22.
Structure and function are correlatabie in living organisms. Can you justify this by taking plasma membrane as an example?
Answer:
Plasma membrane is made up of bilayered lipids. Later biochemical investigations clearly revealed that the plasma membrane also possess protein and carbohydrate. The lipid component of the membrane is phosphoglycerides. The proteins present in the membrane are integral or peripheral type. Integral proteins are burried in the membrane. Peripheral proteins are on the surface of the membrane. Plasma membrane play an important role in transport of the molecules into and out of cells. This membrane is selectively permeable to some molecules present on either side of it. Many molecules can move freely across the membrane without utilising energy is called passive transport of ions.

As the polar molecules cannot pass through non-polar lipid bilayer, they require carrier protein of the membrane to facilitate their transport across the membrane against concentration gradient i.e, from lower to higher concentration. Such a transport by utilising energy is called active transport of ions.
Ex : Na+/K+ Pump.

Question 23.
Discuss briefly the role of nucleolus in the cells actively involved in protein synthesis.
Answer:
The nucleoplasm contains nucleous and chromatin material. The nucledi are spherical structures, involved in the synthesis of ribosomal RNA. Longer and more numerous nucledi are present in cells actively carrying out protein synthesis. The nucleous develops from the secondary constriction of a specialized chromosome known as the “nucleolar organiser”. The nucleolus consists of RNA, protein and small amount of DNA. It disappears during the end of prophase and reappears at the end of Telophase. It is also called Plasmosome or ‘Ribosomal factory1. –

Question 24.
Explain the association of Carbohydrate to the plasma membrane and its significance.
Answer:
Plasma membrane is made up of lipids and proteins. Later, biochemicals investigations clearly revealed that the cell membrance also possess protein and carbohydrate. They are present s short, unfranched or branched chains of sugars (oligosaccharides) attached either to exterior ectoproteins or the polar ends of phospholipids at the external surface of the plasma membrane. All types of oligosaccharides of the plasma membrane are formed by various combinations of six principle sugars like D-galactose, D-mannose, L-fructose, N-acetyl neuramic acid (sialic acid), N-acetyl D-glucosamine and N-acetyl – D – gaiactosamine.

Significance :

  1. Glycophorins are found to contain certain antigenic determinants for the ABO Blood groups and MN flood groups.
  2. Sialic acid contents a high negative change to the cell surface of erythrocyte.

Question 25.
Multicellular organisms have division of labour. Explain.
Answer:
Multicellular organisms are made up of millions and trillions of cells. All these cells perform specific functions. All the cells specialised for performing similar functions are grouped together as tissues in the body. Hence a particular function is carried out by a group of cells at a definite plae in the body. Similarly different functions are carried out by different groups of cells in an organism. By dividing labour, multicelled organisms are able to complete more complex tasks.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 9 Cell: The Unit of Life

Question 26.
What are nuclear pores? State their function.
Answer:
The nuclear membrane is interupted by a minute pores. Which are formed by the fusion of its two membranes. These pores are called Nuclear pores. These regulate the transportation of molecular, between the nucleus and cytoplasm. In eukaryotic cells, the nucleus is separated from the cytoplasm by nuclear envelope. The envelope safeguards the DNA contained in the nucleus. Inspite of this barrier, there is still communication between the nucleus and cytoplasm by nuclear pores.

Each nuclear pore is a large complex of proteins that allows small molecules and ions to freely pass of diffuse into or out of the nucleus. Nuclear pores also allow necessary proteins to enter the nucleus from the cytoplasm ; if the proteins have special sequences that indicate, they belong to the nucleus. These sequences tags are known as nuclear localization signals. Similarly RNA transcribed in the nucleus and proteins are destined to enter the cytoplasm have nuclear export sequences that tag them for release through the nuclear pores.

Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What structural and functional attributes must a cell have to be called a living cell?
Answer:
All living organisms are made up of cells and product of cells. Cell is the basic structural and functional unit of living organism. Each cell have different organelles and perform different functions.

  1. Cells obey laws of energetics i.e., they transform energy.
  2. Cells highly structured with emergent properties.
  3. Cells have an evolutionary origin.
  4. Cells metabolize means possess metabolic pathways, process nutrients, self adjust to environment.
  5. Cells self replicate – nucleic acids, ribosomes.
  6. Cells osmoregulate – vacuoles, vesicles.
  7. Cells communicate – Glycoproteins.
  8. Cells shows animation Cyclosis.
  9. Cell grow, divide and differentiate.
  10. Cells die.

Question 2.
Eukaryotic cells have organelles which may
a) Not be bound by a membrane
b) Bound by a single membrane
c) Bound by a double membrane.
Give the various sub-cellular organelles into these three categories.
Answer:
a) Not be bound by a membrane : Nucleolus
b) Bound by a single membrane : Lysosomes, vacuoles.
c) Bound by a double membrane : Mitochondria, chloroplast, nucleus..

Question 3.
The genomic content of the nucleus is constant for a given species where as the extra chromosomal DNA is found to be variable among the members of a population. Explain.
Answer:
In Prokaryotes (Bacteria) in addition to the genomic DNA, small circular DNA molecules are present in the cytoplasm. These small DNA molecules are called plasmids. They confers unique phenotypic character to such bacteria (i.e.,) resistance to antibiotics. It is also used to monitor bacterial transformation with foreign DNA.

In Eukaryotes, extra DNA molecules are present both in chloroplast (stroma) and mitochondria (matrix). Because of the presence of this DNA molecules, they are treated as self – autonomous cell organelles.

Question 4.
Justify the statement. “Mitochondria are power houses of the cell.
Answer:
Mitochondria is sausage – shaped or cylindrical structure having a diameter of 0.2 to 1.0 µm and length 1.0 to 4.1 µm. Each mitochondrion is a double membrane bound structure with outer membrane and inner membrane dividing its lumen distinctly into two aqueous compartments. The inner compartment is called the matrix. The outer membrane forms the continuous limiting boundary of the organelle. The inner membrane forms a number of infoldings called the cristae towards the matrix.

The cristae increase the surface area. The mitochondria are the sites of aerobic respiration. They produce cellular energy in the form of ATP, hence they are called “power houses” of the cell. The matrix also possesses a single circular DNA molecule, a few RNA molecules, ribosomes (70s) and the compartments required for the synthesis of proteins.
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 9 Cell The Unit of Life 3

Question 5.
Is there a species specific or region specific type of plastids? How does on distinguish one from the other?
Answer:
Plastids are species specific and are found in all plant cells and in euglenoides. They bear some specific pigments thus imparting specific colours to the part of the plant which posseses them. Based on the type of pigments, plastids are classified into three types. They are Leucoplasts, Chromoplasts, Chloroplasts.

Leucoplasts :
They are the colourless plastids which store food materials. Based on the storage product, they are of 3 types namely Amyloplasts (store starch), elaioplasts (store oils) and aleuroplasts (store proteins).

Chromoplasts :
They are coloured pigments which were in yellow, orange or red in colour. In these plastids, fat soluble carotenoids like carotene and xanthophylls are present which imparts orange, red or yellow colour.

Chlorplasts :
These are green coloured plastids which help in synthesis of food materials by photosynthesis. They contain chlorophyll and carotenoid pigments which trap light energy. Each chloroplast is a oval or spherical, double membrane bound cell organelle. The space present inner to inner membrane is called stroma. A number of organised flattened membranas sacs called thyloukoids are present in the stroma.

Thylakoids are arranged in stacks like the piles of coins called grana. The thylakoids of the different grana are connected by membranous tubules called the stroma lamellae. The stroma of the chloroplast contains enzymes required for the syntheis of carbohydrates and proteins.

Question 6.
Write the functions of the following.
a) Centromere b) Cell wall c) Smooth ER d) Golgi complex e) Centrioles
Answer:
a) Centromere :
It is required for proper chromosome seggregation. The centromere keeps the two sister chromatids together. It is also where the chromosomes attaches to the spindle apparatus during Mitosis and Meiosis.

b) Cell wall:
It gives a definite shape to the cell and protects the cell from mechanical damage and infection. It also helps in cell-to-cell interaction and acts as a barrier to undesirable macromolecules.

c) Smooth ER :
It helps in synthesis of lipids, metabolism of carbohydrates and calcium concentration, drug detoxification and attachment of receptors on cell membrane proteins. The smooth ER also contains the enzyme Glucose – 6 – Phosphatase which converts Glucose – 6 – Phosphate to Glucose.

d) Golgi complex :
It is the important site for the formation of glycoproteins and glycolipids. It is also involved in the synthesis of cell wall materials and also plays a main role in the formation of cell plate during cell division.

e) Centrioles :
They form the basal body of cilia and flagella and spindle fibres that give rise to spindle apparatus during cell division in animal cells.

Question 7.
Are the different types of plastids interchangeable? If yes, give examples where they are getting converted from one type to another.
Answer:
Yes. Plastids are inter changeable in form. Generally three types of plastids are present in plant cells namely, leucoplasts (storage), chromoplasts (coloured, attraction) and chloroplasts (synthesis of food). Chromoplasts are coloured plastids (orange, yellow or red), occurs in the cells of petals, fruits etc.

They contain less chlorophylls.and more carotenes (orange) or (red) and xanthophylls (yellow). The red colour of tomato is due to the presence of lycopene in the chromoplasts. The chromoplasts of red algae contain phycocyanin and phycoerythrin. The chromoplasts of Brown algae contain fucoxanthin.

Depending upon circumstances, one type of plastid may be converted into another type.
For Ex :

  1. The leucoplasts in stem tubers of potato, on exposure to sunlight transofrm into chloroplasts.
  2. In capsicum, the cells of ovary consists of leucoplasts. When ovary changes into fruit, leucoplasts are transformed into chloroplasts. When the fruit ripens chloroplasts are changed into chromoplasts.

Question 8.
Describe the structure of the following with the help of labelled diagrams.
i) Nucleus ii) Centrosome.
Answer:
i) Nucleus :
It was first discovered by Robert Brown. Later the material of the nucleus stained by the basic dyes was given the name chromatin by Flemming. The interphase nucleus has highly extended and elaborate nucleoprotein fibres called chromatin, nuclear matrix and one or two nucleoli. Electron micrsocopy has revealed that the nucleus is covered by double layered nuclear envelope, with a space between called perinuclear space, forms a barrier between materials present inside the nucleus and the cytoplasm.
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 9 Cell The Unit of Life 2

The outer nuclear envelope remains continuous with the endoplasmic reticulum and also bears ribosomes. At a number of places, the nuclear envelope is interrupted by nuclear pores, which allows the passage of RNA and protein molecules in both directions between the nucleus and cytoplasm. The nucleoplasm contains nucleolus and chromatin. The nucleoli and spherical structures, involved in active ribosomal RNA synthesis. The chromatin, in different stages of cell division, become chromosomes. They contain DNA and some basic proteins called histones and also RNA. Nucleus plays an important role in biogensis of ribosomes. It plays a significant role in mitosis.

ii) Centrosome :
Centrosome is an organelle usually containing two cylindrical structures called centrioles. They are surrounded by amorphous pericentriolar materials. Both the centrioles in a centrosome lie perpendicular to each other in which each has an organisation like cartwheel. They are made up of nine evenly spaced peripheral fibrils of tubulin. Each of the peripheral fibril is a triplet. The adjacent triplets are also linked. The central part of the centriol is also proteinaceous and called the ‘hub’, which is connected with tubules of the peripheral triplets by radial spokes made of protein. The centrioles form the basal body of cilia and flagella and spindle fibres that give rise to spindle apparatus during cell divirsion in animal cells.
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 9 Cell The Unit of Life 4

Question 9.
What is a centromere? How does the position of centromere form the basis of classification of chromosomes. Support your answer with a diagram showing the position of centromere on different types of chromosomes.
Answer:
Centromere is the region of chromosome that becomes attached to spindle fibres. Special proteins surrounded the centromere. They form a disc shaped structures called kinetochores.

Each chromosome shows centromere at a specific position. Basing on the position of centromere, four types of chromosomes are recognised. They are :
1) Metacentric :
“If the centromere is situated at mid point of a choromosome”. It is “V” shaped and consists of two equal arms.

2) Sub-metacentric :
“If the centromere is situated slightly away from mid point of a chromosome”. It is ‘L’ shaped. It consists of two unequal arms.

C) Acrocentric :
If the centromere is situated at the sub terminal position of a chromosome. It is rod shaped or “J” shaped. It consists of very long arm and a very small arm.

D) Telocentric :
“If the centromere is situated at the terminal position of a chromosome”. It is “i” shaped and has only one arm.
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 9 Cell The Unit of Life 5

Intext Questions

Question 1.
What is a mesosome in a prokaryotic cell? Mention the functions that it performs.
Answer:
Extensions of plasma membrane into the cell in the form of vesicles, tubules and lamellae are called mesosomes. They help in cell wall formation, DNA Replication and its distribution to daughter cells, in respiration, secretion and to increase the surface area of plasma membrane (absorption of nutrients) and enzymatic content.

Question 2.
How do neutral solutes move across the plasma membrane? Can the polar molecules also move across it in the same way? If not, then how are these transported across the membrane?
Answer:
Neutral solutes move across the plasma membrane by the process of simple diffusion along the concentration gradient. Polar molecules cannot pass through the non polar lipid bilayer, they require a carrier protein of the membrane to facilitate their transport across the membrane.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 9 Cell: The Unit of Life

Question 3.
Name the two cell-organelles that are double membrane bound. What are the characteristics of these two organelles? State their functions and draw labelled diagrams of both.
Answer:
Chloroplast and Mitochondria.

  1. Chlorplast is a lens shaped, oval or spherical or even ribbon like organelle, involves in photosynthesis.
  2. Mitochondria is a sausage shaped or cylindrical cell organelle, involved in Respiration.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 9 Cell The Unit of Life 1

Question 4.
What are the characteristics of prokaryotic cells.
Answer:
i) Nuclear envelope is absent. Cell shows a single circular, supercoiled naked DNA called nucleoid.
ii) Nucleous is absent.
iii) Endomembrane system is absent.
iv) Mitochondria, plastids, lysosomes, peroxisomes and cytoskeleton are absent.
v) Respiratory enzymes are located in cell membrane.
vi) 70 s type of ribosomes are present.
vii) Cell is surrounded by a cell wall, made up of polysaccharides, lipids and proteins.
viii) Cells divide amitotically.

Question 5.
Multicellular organisms have division of labour. Explain.
Answer:
Multicellular organisms are made up of millions and trillions of cells. All these cells perform specific functions. All the cells specialised for performing similar functions are grouped together as tissues in the body. Hence a particular function is carried out by a group of cells at a definite plae in the body. Similarly different functions are carried out by different groups of cells in an organism. By dividing labour, multicelled organisms are able to complete more complex tasks.

Question 6.
Cell is the basic unit of life. Discuss in brief.
Answer:
Schleiden explained a large number of plants and observed that all plants are composed Of different kinds of cells which form the tissues of the plant. All living organisms are composed of cells and products of cells. All cells arise from pre-existing cells. A cell is the basic unit of life. It is the smallest unit (or building block) of a living organism that is capable of life. Within cells, there are structures that work togehter to allow the cell to live. Some structures transport materials throughout the cell other structures make food and others release energy for the cell to use.

Question 7.
What are nuclear pores ? State their function.
Answer:
The nuclear membrane is interupted by a minute pores. Which are formed by the fusion of its two membranes. These pores are called Nuclear pores. These regulate the transportation of molecular, between the nucleus and cytoplasm. In eukaryotic cells, the nucleus is separated from the cytoplasm by nuclear envelope. The envelope safeguards the DNA contained in the nucleus. Inspite of this barrier, there is still communication between the nucleus and cytoplasm by nuclear pores.

Each nuclear pore is a large complex of proteins that allows small molecules and ions to freely pass of diffuse into or out of the nucleus. Nuclear pores also allow necessary proteins to enter the nucleus from the cytoplasm ; if the proteins have special sequences that indicate, they belong to the nucleus. These sequences tags are known as nuclear localization signals. Similarly RNA transcribed in the nucleus and proteins are destined to enter the cytoplasm have nuclear export sequences that tag them for release through the nuclear pores.

Question 8.
Both lysosomes and vacuoles are endomembrane structures, yet they differ in terms of their functions. Comment.
Answer:
Lysosomes are the membrane found vesicular structures, filled with hydrolytic enzymes capable of digesting proteins, lipids and nucleic acids. These enzymes are optimally active at the acidic pH. Under starvation, lysosomes digest cellular contents by releasing hydrylyzing enzymes and cause death of cells called acetolysis.

Vacuole is the membrane found space present in the cytoplasm, contains mainly water, metabolic bye products, excretions and other waste materials. In some plant cells, vacuolar sap contains some pigments like anthocyanin which impart colour to the plant part; The vacuole is covered by single membrane called Tonoplast. The tonoplast facilitates the transport of number of ions and other materials against concentration gradients, into the vacuole. Vacuoles play an important role in osmoregulation.

Question 9.
Describe the structure of the following with the help of labelled diagrams.
(i) Nucleus (ii) Centrosome
Answer:
i) Nucleus :
It was first discovered by Robert Brown. Later the material of the nucleus stained by the basic dyes was given the name chromatin by Flemming. The interphase nucleus has highly extended and elaborate nucleoprotein fibres called chromatin, nuclear matrix and one or two nucleoli. Electron micrsocopy has revealed that the nucleus is covered by double layered nuclear envelope, with a space between called perinuclear space, forms a barrier between materials present inside the nucleus and the cytoplasm.

The outer nuclear envelope remains continuous with the endoplasmic reticulum and also bears ribosomes. At a number of places, the nuclear envelope is interrupted by nuclear pores, which allows the passage of RNA and protein molecules in both directions between the nucleus and cytoplasm. The nucleoplasm contains nucleolus and chromatin. The nucleoli and spherical structures, involved in active ribosomal RNA synthesis. The chromatin, in different stages of cell division, become chromosomes. They contain DNA and some basic proteins called histones and also RNA. Nucleus plays an important role in biogensis of ribosomes. It plays a significant role in mitosis.

ii) Centrosome :
Centrosome is an organelle usually containing two cylindrical structures called centrioles. They are surrounded by amorphous pericentriolar materials. Both the centrioles in a centrosome lie perpendicular to each other in which each has an organisation like cartwheel. They are made up of nine evenly spaced peripheral fibrils of tubulin. Each of the peripheral fibril is a triplet. The adjacent triplets are also linked. The central part of the centriol is also proteinaceous and called the ‘hub’, which is connected with tubules of the peripheral triplets by radial spokes made of protein. The centrioles form the basal body of cilia and flagella and spindle fibres that give rise to spindle apparatus during cell divirsion in animal cells.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 9 Cell: The Unit of Life

Question 10.
What is a centromere? How does the position of centromere form the basis of classification of chromosomes. Support your answer with a diagram showing the position of centromere on different types of chromosomes.
Answer:
Centromere is the region of chromosome that becomes attached to spindle fibres. Special proteins surrounded the centromere. They form a disc shaped structures called kinetochores.

Each chromosome shows centromere at a specific position. Basing on the position of centromere, four types of chromosomes are recognised. They are :
1) Metacentric :
“If the centromere is situated at mid point of a choromosome”. It is “V” shaped and consists of two equal arms.

2) Sub-metacentric :
“If the centromere is situated slightly away from mid point of a chromosome”. It is ‘L’ shaped. It consists of two unequal arms.

C) Acrocentric :
If the centromere is situated at the sub terminal position of a chromosome. It is rod shaped or “J” shaped. It consists of very long arm and a very small arm.

D) Telocentric :
“If the centromere is situated at the terminal position of a chromosome”. It is “i” shaped and has only one arm.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 8 Taxonomy of Angiosperms

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material 8th Lesson Taxonomy of Angiosperms Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material 8th Lesson Taxonomy of Angiosperms

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What is ‘Omega Taxonomy’?
Answer:
Omega Taxonomy is the Taxonomy based on information from other branches i.e., Embryology, Cytology, Palynology, Phytochemistry, Serology etc., along with Morphological characters.

Question 2.
What is the Natural system of plant classification? Name the scientists who followed it.
Answer:
Plants are classified on the basis of all possible Morphological characters is called the Natural system of classification. It was proposed by ‘Bentham’ and ‘Hooker’.

Question 3.
Explain the scope and significance of ‘Numerical Taxonomy’.
Answer:
Numerical Taxonomy is a branch of taxonomy that use mathematical methods to evaluate observable differences and similarities between taxonomic groups. In this, number and codes are assigned to all the characters and the data are then processed. Each character is given equal importance and at the same time hundreds of charactes can be considered.

Question 4.
What is geocarpy? Name the plant which exhibits this phenomenon.
Answer:
Geocarpy is the development of fruits inside the soil. It is seen in Arachis (ground nut).

Question 5.
Name the type of pollination mechanism found in members of Fabaceae.
Answer:
‘Piston Mechanism’.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 8 Taxonomy of Angiosperms

Question 6.
Write the floral formula of solanum plant.
Answer:
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 8 Taxonomy of Angiosperms 1

Question 7.
Give the technical description of ovary in solanum nigrum.
Answer:
Bicarpellarly, Syncarpous, bilocular,superior ovary with many ovules on swollen axile placentation. Carpels are arranged obliquely at 45°.

Question 8.
Give the technical description of anther of Allium cepa.
Answer:
In Allium cepa. Anthers are dithecs, basifixed, Introrse and dehisce longitudinally.

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Write a brief note on semi technical description of a typical flowering plant.
Answer:
The plant is described beginning with its habit, habitat, vegetative characters (root, stem, leaves) and floral characters (inflorescence, flower and its parts) followed by fruit. Then floral diagram and a floral formula are presented. In floral formula, Br stands for bracteate (bracts are present), Ebr stands for ebracteate (bracts are absent). Brl stands for bracteolate (bracteoles are present), Ebrl stands for ebracteolates
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 8 Taxonomy of Angiosperms 2

Floral formula also indicates the number of free or united (within brackets) numbers Of the each whorl and also show cohesion or adhesion of stamens. Floral diagram provides information about the number of parts of a flower, their arrangement and the relation they have with one another. The mother axis represents the posterior side of the flower indicates as a dot or circle at the top of the floral diagram. K, C, A and G are drawn in successive whorls. The bract represents the anterior side of the flower and is indicated at the bottom of the floral diagram.

Question 2.
Describe the non-essential floral parts of plants belonging to Fabaceae.
Answer:
In Fabaceae, non-essential floral parts are Calyx and Corolla.

Calyx :
Sepals 5, gamosepalous, imbricate aestivation, odd sepal anterior.

Corolla :
Petals 5, polypetalous, papilionaceous type consists of a large posterior petal (standard) two laterals (wings). Two anterior fused petals (keel) enclosing essential organs. They show vexillary/descendingly imbricate aestivation.

Question 3.
Give an account of floral diagram.
Answer:
A floral diagram representing the number of parts of flower, the structure, arrangement, aestivation, cohesion and adhesion of stamens and position with respect to mother axis. The mother axis represents the posterior side of the flower and is indicated as dot at the top of the floral diagram. K, C, A, G are drawn in successive whorls. Calyx being the outermost and the gynoecium being the centre represented by T.S. of ovary. The bract represents the anterior side of the flower and is indicated at the bottom of the floral diagram.
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 8 Taxonomy of Angiosperms 3

Question 4.
Describe the essential floral parts of plants belonging to Lilliaceae.
Answer:
The essential floral parts of Lilliaceae are Androecium and Gynoecium.
Androecium :
Six stamens in two whorls, free or Epipyllous, anthers are Dithecus Basifixed, Introrse and dehisce longitudinally.

Gynoecium :
Tricarpellary, Syncarpous, trilocular superior ovary with many ovules on axile placentation. Style is terminal and stigma is trifid and capitate.

Question 5.
Write a brief account on the class of Dicotyledanae of Bentham and Hooker’s classification.
Answer:
In Bentham and Hookers classification, the class Dicotyledonae was divided into three sub classes namely Polypetalae, Gamopetalae and Monochlamydae. Polypetalae, sub class is divided into three series namely Thalamiflorae (6 orders), disciflorae (4 orders) and Calyciflorae (5 orders). Gamopetalae, sub class is divided into three series namely Inferae (3 orders), Heteromerae (3 orders) and Bicarpellatae (4 orders). Monochlamydae was divided into eight series.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 8 Taxonomy of Angiosperms

Question 6.
Explain floral formula.
Answer:
The floral formula is represented by some symbols of floral parts. In it, Br stands for bracteate (bracts are present), Ebr stands for ebracteate, (bracts are absent), Brl stands for bracteolate (bracteoles are present).

Ebrl stands for ebracteolates (bracteoles are absent).
⊕ stands for actinomorphic flower,
% stands for zygomorphic flower.
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 8 Taxonomy of Angiosperms 4
ovary. Floral formula also indicates the number of free or united members of the corresponding whorls. It also shows cohesion or adhesion of stamens.

Question 7.
Give economic importance of plants belonging to Fabaceae.
Answer:
Economic importance :

  1. Pulses like red gram (Cajanus cajan), black gram (Phaseolus mungo), green gram (Phaseolus aureus), Bengal gram (Cicer aritetinum) are a rich source of proteins.
  2. Pods of Dolichos, Glycine are used as vegetables.
  3. Seeds of Pisurn and Arachis are edible.
  4. Groundnut oil from Arachis hypogea seeds and soyabean oil from seeds of Glycine max are used in cooking.
  5. The oil cake from Arachis hypogea is used as fodder.
  6. The oil from the seeds of Derris indica is used in the making of medicines.
  7. Goldsmiths use the seeds of Abrus precatorius for weighting.
  8. Several crops are used in crop rotation due to their nitrogen fixing ability.
  9. Seeds of Trigonella are used as condiment and medicine. The leaves are used as vegetable.
  10. Sesbania andTephrosia are used as green manure.
  11. Crotalaria and Phaseolus are used as fodder.
  12. Fibre from Crotalaria is used in making ropes.
  13. Indigofera yields blue dye, which is used as a fabric whitener.
  14. Wood from pterocarpus is used for making musical instruments.
  15. Wood from Da/zberg/a is used for making furniture.

Question 8.
Describe the essential organs of Solanaceae.
Answer:
Androecium :
There are five epipetalous stamens alternating witht he petals and are free. Anthers are dithecous, basifixed and introse. The dehiscence may be longitudinal (Datura) or Porous (So/anum).

Gynoecium :
The ovary is superior, bicarpellary and syncarpous. It is oblique in position and anterior carpel to the left at an angle of 45°. Usually bilocular occassionally unilocular (Capsicum). There are numerous anatropous ovules arranged on axile placeritation on swollen placenta. The style is terminal and stigma is capitate,

Long Answer type Questions

Question 1.
Describe the characteristics of plants belonging to Fabaceae.
Answer:
VEGETATIVE CHARACTERISTICS :
Habitat:
Most of the members of this family are mesophytes.

Habit :
The plants are annual herbs, some are shrubs, some others are trees. Some are weak stemmed that climb as twiners (Dolichos) or with tendrils (Pisum).

Root System :
It is tap root system. The roots bear root nodules in which the symbiotic nitrogen fixing bacteria. Rhizobia are present.

Stem :
It is aerial, erect, herbaceous or woody. In some plants stem is weak and prostrate or twinner (Dolichos) or a tendril Climber (Pisum, Lathyrus).

Leaf:
Leaves are cauline, alternate, stipulate, petiolate and dorsiventral. The leaf base is pulvinous. They are simple or pinnately compound, the entire leaf except stipules in Lathyrus and terminal leaflets in Pisum are modified into tendrils. In ulex, the leaflets are modified into spines. Venation is Reticulate.

Floral characteristics :
Inflorescence :
It is usually an axillary or terminal raceme (Crotalaria).

Flower :
Flowers are bracteate, bracteoles may be present or absent, pedicellate, complete, zygomorphic, bisexual, pentamerous and perigynous. The thalamus is cup shaped.

Calyx :
There are five sepals which are fused. The aestivation is valvate. The odd sepal is anterior in position.
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 8 Taxonomy of Angiosperms 5

Corolla :
It consists of five petals which are free (Polypetalous). The corolla is papilionaceous. The posterior petal is largest and is called ‘Standard petal or Vexillum’. The two lateral petals are called ‘Wings or Alae’. The two boat shaped petals are called ‘Keel or Carina’. These are fused and encloses the essential organs. The aestivation is ‘descendingly imbricate’.

Androecium :
It consists of 10 stamens occasionally there may be only 9 stamens (Abrus, Datbargis). Usually the filaments of the stamens unite to form two bundles of 9 + 1 (Diadelphous) as in Dofichos, Tephrosia, Pisum etc., or a single bundle (Monadelphous) as in Crotalaria, Arachis etc. Anthers are dithecous, introrse and dehisce longitudinally.

Gynoecium :
It consists of monocarpellary, unilocular, half-inferior ovary. Usually many pendulous ovules are arranged in two vertical rows on marginal placentation. Style is long and curved at the apex. Stigma is capitate.
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 8 Taxonomy of Angiosperms 6

Pollination :
As flowers are protandrous, usually cross pollination occurs. In lathyrus andpisum, there is self pollination.

Fruit:
Mostly the fruit is a legume or pod (Pisum, Cajanus, Dolichos). In pterocarpus and Dalbergia it is a samara while in Arachis the pods are indehiscent and geocarpic.

Seed :
It is non-endospermic and dicotyledonous. The cotyledons store proteins in large quantities.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 8 Taxonomy of Angiosperms

Question 2.
Write about the key characteristics of Solanaceae.
Answer:
VEGETATIVE CHARACTERS :

Habitat :
These plants are mostly mesophytes. A few are xerophytes. (Solarium surattense).

Habit :
Mostly annual or perennial herbs. Some are shrubs (Oestrum sps).

Root system :
Tap root system.

Stem :
It is aerial, erect and mostly herbaceous. Stem is an underground tuber in Solanum tuberosum (potato). Bicollateral vascular bundles are present in the stem.

Leaf :
Leaves are exstipulate, petiolate and show alternate phyllotaxy. They are usually or pinnately lobed. Venation is reticulate.

FLORAL CHARACTERS :
Inflorescence :
It is usually cymose type. It may be terminal or axillary in position. In some species of Solarium, it is an axillary. In Datura, it is solitary and terminal, panicle in tobacco.
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 8 Taxonomy of Angiosperms 7

Flower :
The flowers are bracteate or ebracteate, ebracteolate, pedicellate, actinomorphic, complete, bisexual, pentamerous and hypogynous.

Calyx :
It consists of 5 speals which are fused (gamosepalous) and persistent (Capsicum, Solatium). The aestivation is valvate.

Corolla :
The corolla consists of 5 petals and is gamopetalous. The aestivation is valvate or twisted. (Datura)

Androecium :
There are five epipetalous stamens alternating with the petals and are free. Anthers are dithecous, basifixed and introse. The dehiscence may be longitudinal (Datura) or porous (So/anum).

Gynoecium :
The ovary is superior, bicarpellary and syncarpous. It is oblique in position due to the tilting of posterior carpel to the right and anterior carpel to the left at an angle of 45°. Usually bilocular occasionally unilocular (Capsicum). There are numerous anatropous ovules arranged on axile placentation on swollen placenta. The style is terminal and stigma is capitate.
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 8 Taxonomy of Angiosperms 8

Pollination :
Flowers are usually protandrous. Some species of So/anum are protogynous. Cross pollination through insects (entomophily) is common.

Fruit:
The fruit is mostly berry (Capsicum, Solatium, Lycopersicon, Physalis etc.). It is septifragal capsule in Datura and Nicotiana.

Seeds :
The seeds are endospermic and dicotyledonous.

Question 3.
Give an account of the family Liliaceae.
Answer:
VEGETATIVE CHARACTERS :
Habitat:
Plants may be mesophytes (Allium, Ulium) as well as xerophytes (Asparagus, Ruscus, Aloe) are found in this family.

Habit :
Plants are mostly perennial herbs. In some plants like Dracaena, Yucca, Aloe etc., Shrubs or trees are also found. Few are climbers (Gloriosa, Smilax).

Root system :
It is adventitious root system. In Asparagus fasciculated tuberous roots are present.

Stem :
In majority of the species the stem is underground and perennial. It may be a bulb (Sci/la, Allium, Ulium), a Rhizome (Gloriosa) or a corm (Colchicum). The aerial stem is weak in tendril climbers like Gloriosa, Smilax etc. Stem is aerial and shows anomalous secondary growth in Dracaena and Yucca. Branches are modified into cladophyllus (Asperagus, Ruscus).

Leaf:
The leaves may be radical (Allium; Ulium) or cauline (Smilax, Gloriosa). Alternat phyllotaxy is common. Leaves are petiolate, simple stipulate or exstipulate.Venation is usually parallel, but exceptionally reticulate in Smilax. Leaves are succulent in yucca and Aloe.

FLORAL CHARACTERS :

Inflorescence : Solitary cyme or umbel or raceme.
Flower :
The flowrs are usually bracteate, ebracteolate, pedicellate, actinomorphic, complete. Bisexual, homochlamydeous, trimerous and hypogynous. Exceptionally flowers are unisexual in Smilax and Ruscus.

Perianth :
It consists of six tepals arranged in two whorls of three each. The odd tepal is anterior in position. The aestivation is valvate.

Androecium :
Stamens are six, arranged intwo whorls of three each. Epiphyllous (Asparagus). Anthers are dithecous, basifixed, introrse and dehiscence is longitudinal.

Gynoecium :
It is tricarpellary and syncarpous. The oary is superior and trilocular with several anatropous ovules on axile placentation. The style is terminal and stigma is trifid and capitate.
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 8 Taxonomy of Angiosperms 9

Pollination :
It is of entomophilous type. Flowers may be protandrous (Allium) or protogynous (Colchicum) in Glorisa flowers show herkogamy.

Fruit:
It may be a berry (Asparagusr, Smilax) or loculicidal capsule (Lilium) or septicidal capsule (Gloriosa).

Seed :
It is endospermic with straight or sometimes curved embryo and monocotyledonous. Polyembryony is seen in some memebrs (Allium).
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 8 Taxonomy of Angiosperms 10

Question 4.
Write the characteristics of plants that are necessary for classification. Describe them in brief.
Answer:
VEGETATIVE CHARACTERS :
Habit:
Herbs (Plants grow to a height of 1 – 3 feet)

Shrubs (Plants which grow in the form of a bush)
Trees (Plants with erect, woody branched or unbranched)
Habitat : Hydrophytes : (Plants which grow in water)
Mesophytes : (Plants which grow in Moderate climatic conditions)
Xerophytes : (Plants which grow in dry areas)
Root system : Taproot system : (The main root called Tap root, which inturn forms lateral roots and Root lets).
Ex : Dicots.
Fibrous Root system : (Cluster of roots which arise from the base of the stem)
Ex : Monocots.

Stem :
Aerial (which grows aerially) or underground (which grows into the soil), erect (Stands in upright position) or creeping (which grows on the soil Horizontally) Tendril climbers (Climbing with the help of Tendrils) Stragglers (Woody plants that climb up with the help of Hooks or thorns) Lianes (Large woody perennial twinners) Branched (Stem with Branches) or unbranched (stem without Branches) green or Brown or black in colour.

Leaf : Leaf Base :
Pulvinous (Swollen) or sheathing (Broad and surround the stem as envelope).
Stipules : Stipulate (Leaf with stipules)
Exstipulate (Leaf without stipules).

Petiole : Petiolate (Leaf with petiole)
Sessile (Leaf without petiole).

Lamina :
Shape – Ovate (oval) or Linear (Long and slightly Broader) Reniform (Kidney shaped) Cordate (Heart Shaped) Centric (hollow).

Venation :
Reticulate (Midrib, Laterial veins and veinlats are arranged in the form of net like).

Parallel :
(Mid rib produce lateral veins and veinlets arranged parallely).

Kind :
Simple (Leaf with undivided Lamina) .
Compound (Lamina is divided into leaflets).

Phyllotaxy :
Alternate (only one leaf arises at a node)
Opposite (Two leaves arises at each node)
Whorled (More than 2 leaves arises at each node).

FLORAL CHARACTERS :
Inflorescence : Racemose (Peduncle is long)
Cymose (Peduncle is short) ‘
Special (Verticillester or Hypanthodium or Cyathium).

Flower : Bracteate (The flower with Bracts)
Ebracteate (The flower without Bracts)
Bracteolate (The flower with Bracteoles)
Ebracteolate (The flower without Bracteoles)
Pedicillate (The flower with Pedicel)
Sessile (The flower without Pedicel)
Complete (The flower with all four floral parts)
Incomplete (The flower without an any one of the floral parts).

Arrangement of Floral parts Acyclic : The floral parts are spirally arranged.

Cyclic : The floral parts are arranged in whorls.
Hemicyclic : K & C are in whorls and A & G are in spiral Manner).
Sex : Bisexual : The flower with both sex organs.
Unisexual: The flower with any one of the sex organs.

Gynoecium Position : Hypogynous : The flower with superior ovary.
Epigynous : The flower with Inferior ovary.
Perigynous : The flower with Half superior ovary.
Merosity : Trimerous : Three parts in each whorl
Tetramerous : Four parts in each whorl.
Pentamerous : Five parts in each whorl.

Symmetry :
Actinomorphic: A flower can be cut into two equal halves in any vertical plane.

Zygmorphic :
A flower can be cut into two equal halves in one vertical plane.

Calyx :
Number of sepals 3 or 4 or 5, polysepalous (free) or gamo$epalous (fused) valvate (arranged in a whorl) or twristed Aestivation (arranged in one whole with one margin Inside and one margin outside). Imbricate Aestivation (arranged with overlapping pattern).

Corolla :
Number of petals, polypetalous (free) or gamopetalous (fused), Aestivation (valvate or Twisted or Imbricate).

Androecium :
Number of stamens 4 or 5 or 10 or many.
Monadelphous : All are in one Bundle
Diadelphous : All are in two Bundles
Polyadelphous : All are in. more than two Bundles.
dithrecous : Anther with two Theca.
Monothecous : Anther with one Theca.
Basifixed ; Filament gets attached to the Base of the Anther.
Dorsifixed : Filament gets attached to the Dorsal side of the anther.

Dehiscence : Longitudinal (Breaks vertically)
Transverse (Breaks Transversely)
Porous (Pollengrains are released through Apical pore).

Gynoecium :
Monocarpellary – The ovary with one carpel.
Bicarpellary – The ovary with Two carpels.
Tricarpellary – The ovary with Three carpels.
Tetracarpellary – The ovary with Four carpels.
Pentacarpellary – The ovary with Five carpels. .
Multicarpellary – The ovary with more than five carpels.
Syncarpous : All the carpels are fused.
Apocarpous : All the carpels are free.
Superior ovary : K, C, A develops from the base of the ovary.
Interior ovary : K, C, A develops from the upper part of the ovary.
Half superior ovary : K, C, A develops from the centre (Half) of the ovary.

Placentation :
Marginal (Ovules are arranged on Placenta present along the margins).
Axile (Ovules are arranged on the centre)
Basal (Ovules are arranged at the Base of the ovary).

Style : Terminal (develops above the ovary)
Laferal (develops from the latual side).

Stigma : Capitate (Round) Bifid (divided Hairy (with hairs).

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 8 Taxonomy of Angiosperms

Question 5.
Describe typical flowering plant in the taxonomic perspective.
Answer:
The plant is described beginning with vegetative characters like Habit (Herb or Shrub or Tree or Climber), Habitat (Hydrophyte, Mesophyte or Xerophyte), roots (Taproot or Fibrous root). Stem (aerial, erect, herbacious or woody), leaves (Simple or Compound, Reticulate or Parallel venation stipulate or exstipulate, Alternate or opposite or cyclic phyllotaxy) and then floral characters. Inflorescence (Recemose or Cymose) Flower and its floral parts followed fruit. After this, a floral diagram and floral flormula, are presented.

The floral formula is represented by some symbols of floral parts. In it, Br stands for Bracteate (Bracts are present). Ebr stands for Ebracteate (Bracts are absent) Brl stands for Bracteolate (Bracteoles are present). Ebrl stands for Ebrapteolates (Bracteoles are absent).
⊕ stands for Actinomorphic flower,
% stands for Zygomorphic flower.
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 8 Taxonomy of Angiosperms 11
for inferior ovary. Floral formula also indicates the number of free or united members of the corresponding whorls. It also shows cohesion or Adhesion of stamens.

A floral diagram representing the number of parts of flower, the structure, arrangement, aestivation, cohesion and adhesion of stamens and position with respect to mother axis. The mother axis represents the posterior side of the flower and is indicated as dot at the top of the floral diagram. K, C, A, G are drawn in successive whorls. Calyx being the outermost and the gynoecium being the centre represented by T.S. of ovary. The bract represents the anterior side of the flower and is indicated at the bottom of the floral diagram.
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 8 Taxonomy of Angiosperms 3

Question 6.
Give an account of Bentham and Hooker’s classification of plants.
Answer:
Bentham and Hooker divided the flowering plants into three classes namely Dicotyledonae, Gymnospermae and Monocotyledonae. Dicotyledonae was divided into three subclasses namely polypetalae Gamopetalae and Monochlamydae. Polypetalae was divided into three series namely Thalamiflorae, disciflorae, Calyciflorae.

Thalamiflorae includes 6 order, disciflorae with 4 orders and Calyciflorae is with 5 orders. Gamopetalae was divided into three series namely Inferae (3 order) Heteromerae (3 orders) and Bicarpellatae (4 orders). Monocotyledonae was divided into seven series. Thus they grouped the flowering plants into 202 natural orders now called as families. Of these 165 families belongs Dicottyledonae, 3 to Gymnospermae and 34 belong to Monocotyledonae.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 8 Taxonomy of Angiosperms

Question 7.
What is taxonomy 7 Give a brief account of different types of plant classification.
Answer:
Plant taxonomy deals with characterization, Identification nomenclature and classification of plants.

Several classifications were proposed by different taxonomists based on various criteria. All these classifications can be grouped into 3 types.

  1. Artificial systems,
  2. Natural systems,
  3. Phylogenetic systems.

1) Artificial systems :
These systems are based on one or few easily comparable characters like morphology, nutritional habits etc.
e.g.: A) Classification of plants into herbs, shrubs, trees etc., on the basis of form by Theophrastus in his book “Historia Plantarum”.

B) Sexual system of Linnaeus, in which he classify the plants on the basis of morphological nature of stamens and carpels.

2) Natural systems :
These are the systems in which plants are grouped on the basis of their natural reltionships taking into consideration all possible morphological characters. They believed that all species are specially created by God and they do not undergo any change.
E.g. : Classification of Bentham and Hooker.

3) Phylogenetic systems :
The classification of post-Darwinian period considered evolutionary trends in plants and so they are considered as Phylogenetic systems. In a phylogenetic system, primitive and advanced characters an recognised. While considering the status of a taxon, a comprehensive picture of all the characters is taken into account. The system proposed by Engler and Prantl in their book, “Die Naturlichen Planzenfamilien” (1887-1893) and by J.Hutchinson (1954) in his book, “Families of flowering plants” are examples. The latest phylogenetic system is APG (Angiospermic Phyogenetic Group) system.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 6 Modes of Reproduction

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material 6th Lesson Modes of Reproduction Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material 6th Lesson Modes of Reproduction

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What is the dominant phase in the life cycle of an angiosperm?
Answer:
The dominant phase in the life cycle of an angiosperm is the Diploid sporophyte.

Question 2.
What is meant by heterospory? Mention the two types of spores developed in an angiospermic plant?
Answer:
Heterospory means the formation of more than one type of spores. Microspores and Megaspores are developed in an angiospermic plant.

Question 3.
Mention the modes of reproduction in Algae and Fungi.
Answer:
In Algae (Chlamydomonas) Reproduction is by motile zoospores and by fragmentation. In fungi (Rhizopus), reproduction is by non motile spores produced in the sporangia and by fragmentation.

Question 4.
How do Liver worts reproduce vegetatively?
Answer:
Reproduction in liver worts is by specialized structure via fragmentation called ‘Gemmae’.

Question 5.
Mention any two characteristics of bacteria and yeast that enable them to reproduce asexually.
Answer:

  1. Rapid Growth.
  2. The offsprings produced asexually are not only identical to one another but are also exact copies of their parent.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 6 Modes of Reproduction

Question 6.
Why do we refer to offspring formed by asexual method of reproduction as clones?
Answer:
There is no involvement of sex organs. Hence the offsprings produced by Asexual Reproduction are called clones.

Question 7.
Between an annual and a perinneal plant, which one has a shorter juvenile phase? Give one reason.
Answer:
Annual have a shorter Juvenile phase because they show clear cut vegetative reproductive and senescent phases.

Question 8.
Rearrange the following events of sexual reproduction in the sequence in which they occur in a flowering plant : embryogenesis, fertilisation, gametogenesis, pollination.
Answer:
Gametogenesis, Pollination, Fertilisation, Embryogenesis.

Question 9.
Is there a relationship between the size of an organism and its life span?
Answer:
No relationship between the size of an organism and its life span.

Question 10.
Give reasons as to why cell division can or cannot be a type of reproduction in multicellular organisms.
Answer:
In Multicellular organisms, cell division cannot be a type of Reproduction because, Reproduction in them takes place by vegetative Asexual and Sexual Methods.

Question 11.
Which of the following are monoecious and dioecious organisms :
a) Date palm b) Coconut c) Chara d) Marchantia.
Answer:
a) Date Palm – Dioecious
b) oconut – Monoecious
c) Chara – Monoecious
d) Marchantia – Dioecious

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 6 Modes of Reproduction

Question 12.
Match the following given in Column A with the vegetative propagules given in Column B.

Column AColumn B
i) Bryophyiiuma. Offset
ii) Agaveb. Eyes
iii) Potatoc. leaf buds
iv) Water hyacinthd. fragmentation
v) Charae. Sucker
vi) Menthaf. bulbils

Answer:

Column AColumn B
i) BryophyiiumLeaf buds
ii) AgaveBulbils
iii) PotatoEyes
iv) Water hyacinthOffsets
v) CharaFragmentation
vi) MenthaSuckers

Question 13.
What do the following parts of a flower develop into after fertilisation?
a) Ovary b) Stamens c) Ovules d) Calyx.
Answer:
After fertilisation.
a) The ovary develops into a fruit
b) Stamens – wither away
c) Ovules – develop into seeds
d) Calyx – Wither away or persistent in some species (Capsicum, Solanum).

Question 14.
Define vivipary with an example.
Answer:
In Mangrooves, the seeds germinate while still attached to the mother plant is called vivipary”.
Ex : Rhizophora.

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Describe briefly the gametogeneis with suitable example.
(Or)
Write a brief account on gametogenesis with examples.
Answer:
Gametogenesis is a process by which diploid or haploid precursor cells undergo cell division and differentiation to form mature haploid gametes. They are two types.
1) Homogametogenis :
In some algae like cladophora the two gametes are so similar in appearance that it is not possible to categorize them into male and female gametes. They are called hormogametes and process is called homogametogenesis.

2) Heterogametogenesis :
In a majority of sexual reproducing organisms the gametes produced are of two morphologically distinct types. In such organisms, the male gamete is called the authorized and the female gamete is called the egg.
Ex : Funaria, Cycas, Pteris.

Question 2.
Give an account of sexuality in organisms.
(Or)
Describe Sexuality in living organisms.
Answer:
Sexuality involves formation and fusion of the male and female gametes, either by the same individual or by different individuals of the opposite sex. Sexuality in plants is varied, particularly in angiosperms, due to the production of diverse types of flowers. Plants are defined as monoecious and dioecious.

Monoecious :
If the male and female flowers may be present ont he same individual such plants are called as monoecious plants.
Ex : Cucurbita and coconuts.

Dioecious :
If the male and female flowers may be present on the separate individual such plants are called Dioecious plants.
Ex : Papaya and date palm.

In Angiosperms based on sexualty flowers divided into two types. They are :
1) Staminate flowers :
The flowers bearing stamens are called as staminate flowers.

2) Pistillate flowers :
The flowers bearing pistil or Gynoecium are called as pistillate flowers.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 6 Modes of Reproduction

Question 3.
In haploid organisms that undergo sexual reproduction, name the stage in the lifecycle where meiosis occurs. Give reasons for your answer.
Answer:
Zygote :
It goes through Meiosis, it develops into spore or some other in structure. Meiosis produces 4 cells from each zygote and go through Mitosis to become an organism. Then it reproduce a either by Asexual method or by sexual method. It produce gametes, which fuse together, resulting in the formation of zygote. It is called Zygotic life cycle.
Ex : Volvox, Ocologonium.

Question 4.
The number of taxa exhibiting asexual reproduction is drastically reduced in higher plants (angiosperms) when compared to the lower groups of paints. Analyse the possible reasons for this situation.
Answer:
Reproduction is defined as a biological process in which an organism gives rise to young ones similar to itself. Reproduction becomes a vital process without which species cannot survive for long days. Each individual leaves its progeny by asexual or sexual means. Sexual mode of Reproduction enables creation of new variants; So that survival advantage is enhanced.

The plants obtained through asexual reproduction produce offsprings which are identical to each other and to their parent They cannot withstand in different environmental condition. Thats why, the number of taxa exhibiting asexual reproduction is drastically reduced in Higher plants, where as in lower groups of plants. Asexual Reproduction results in formation of large number of spores or cinidia which germinate, increase their Race.

Question 5.
Is it possible to consider vegetative propagation observed in plants like bryophyllum, water hyacinth and ginger as a type of asexual reproduction? Give two/three reasons.
Answer:
In Bryophyllum, buds formed on Knotches of the leaf develop into new Individuals in which no involvement of two parents. So this process is called asexual mode of Reproduction.

In water hyacinth, a weed is formed growing wherever there is stanoling water. It can propagate vegetatively at a phenomenal rate and spread all over the water body in a short period of time. So it is also called asexual mode of Reproduction.

In Ginger, a underground stem modification nodes and internodes are present. At each node, an auxiliary bud is present which develops into new plant, so treated as Asexual Reproduction.

Question 6.
“Fertilisation is not an obligatory event for fruit production in certain plants”. Explain the statement.
Answer:
Production of fruits without fertilisation of ovules is called parthenocarpy. It is common in Banana, grapes, Cucurbita, pollination or other stimulation is required for parthenocarpy called stimulative parthenocarpy. Plants that do not require pollution or simulation to produce parthenocarpic fruits have vegetative parthenocarpy. Seedless cucumbers, watermelons.

Panthenocarp is also desirable in fruit crops that may be difficult to pollinate or fertilize, such as tomato and summer squash. If plant harmones, gibberellin, auxin and cytokinins are sprayed on flowers, they induce parthenocarpy called artificial parthenocarpy. It is also induced by natural agents like low light cool conditions, to produce seedless fruits. Parthenocarpic fruits are advantageous because they are bigger in size, flavour is more :

  1. Easier to eat with less waste.
  2. Shelf like longer due to reduced ethylene generated by seeds.
  3. Seedless fruits have higher total soluble contents so fertilization is not an obligatory event in fruit production.

Question 7.
List the changes observed in angiosperm flower subsequent to pollination and fertilisation.
Answer:
Event in sexual Reproduction after the formation of zygote are called post fertilisation events. They are

  1. Calyx, Corolla, Stamens, style and stigma wither away.
  2. Ovary develops into fruit.
  3. Ovules develop into seeds.
  4. The zygote develops into an embryo.
  5. Primary endosperm nucleus develops into endosperm which provides nourishment to the developing embryo.
  6. The synergid and antipodals degenerate after fertilization.
  7. Funicle of the ovule changes into stalk of the seed.
  8. Outer antegumentofthe ovule changes into testa (outer seed coat). Inner integument changes into Inner seed coat (Tegmen).
  9. Micropyle changes into seed pore.
  10. Hilum changes into scar of the seed.

Question 8.
Suggest a possible explanation why the seeds in a pea pod are arranged in a row where as the tomato are scattered in the juicy pulp.
Answer:
In Pea :
Fruit is legume. It is a dry dehiscent fruit developed from Monocarpellary, unilocular and half superior ovary. At maturity, the fruit splits along the dorsal and ventral sutures and discharge its seeds. More over, the ovules are arranged in Marginal placentation (i.e.,) placentation axis is present along the Margin of Ventral suture. Thats why seeds are arranged in a row in legume (Pea) pod.

In tomato, the fruit is Bery. It is a fleshy fruit develop from superior or Inferior ovary. In this, the margins of the carpels grow inwards to the centre of the ovary forming locules. So that ovules are arranged in a divided central column. Thats why the seeds are scattered in the Juicy pulp which are dispersed after the delay of pulp. ‘

Question 9.
Justify the statement “Vegetative reproduction is also a type of asexual “reproduction”.
Answer:
In multicellular or colonjal forms of algae, moulds and mushrooms, the body may break into smaller fragments. Each fragment thus formed develops into a mature Individual. This process is called Fragmentation. Some plants have specialized structures for reproduction called Gemmae (in liverworts).

In flowering plants, the units of vegetative propagation such as Runners, Stolons, Suckers, Offset, Rhizome, Corm, Stem tuber, Bulb, Bulbil, Reproductive leaves, are cell capable of giving rise to new offsprings. These structures are called vegetative propagules. In all these plant. No involvement of sex organs takes place. So vegetative reproduction is also a asexual Reproduction and formed progeny are called clones.

Question 10.
Define : a) Juvenile phase, b) Reproductive phase.
Answer:
a) All organisms have to reach a certain stage of growth and Maturity in their life, before they can reproduce sexually and this storage is known as Juvenile stage or vegetative pahse.

b) The stage which occurs after the Juvenile stage, which can be seen easily in the higher plants when they came to flower is called Reproductive phase. In this, reproduction occurs either by asexual or by sexual means produce offsprings.

Question 11.
Distinguish between asexual and sexual reproduction. Why is vegetative reproduction also considered as a type of asexual reproduction?
Answer:

Asexual ReproductionSexual Reproduction
1. Single parent is involved.1. Two parents take part in reproduction.
2. Offspring are genetically identical to each other and to their parent.2. Variation occurs in offsprings due to Genetic recombinations.
3. No fertilisation.3. Fertilisation takes place.
4. No gametes are formed.4. Gametes are involved.
5. No mixing of hereditary material.5. Mixing of hereditary material.

In multicellular or colonial forms of algae, moulds and mushrooms, the body may break into smaller fragments. Each fragment thus formed develops into a mature Individual. This process is called Fragmentation. Some plants have specialized structures for reproduction called Gemmae (in liverworts). In flowering plants, the units of vegetative propagation such as Runners, Stolons, Suckers, Offsets, Rhizome, Corm, Stem tuber. Bulb, Bulbil, Reproductive leaves, are capable of giving rise to new offsprings. These structures are called vegetative propagules. In all these plants, sex organs are not involved. So vegetative reproduction is also a asexual Reproduction.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 6 Modes of Reproduction

Question 12.
Identify each part in a flowering plant and write whether it is haploid (n) or diploid (2n).
a) Ovary —– b) Anther —– c) Egg —– d) Pollen —– e) Male gamete —– f) Zygote
Answer:
a) Ovary – Diploid (2n)
b) Anther – Diploid (2n)
c) Egg – Haploid (n)
d) Pollen – Haploid (n)
e) Male gamete – Haploid (n)
f) Zygote – Diploid (2n)

Question 13.
Give a brief account on the phases of the life cycle of an angiosperm plant.
Answer:
In the life cycle of an angiospermic plant, two phases occur alternately. They are
A) Sporophytic phase :
It is diploid (2n) and dominant phase of the life cycle. It is developed from the zygote. Reproductive organs develop on this plant.

B) Gametophytic phase :
It is haploid (n). It is derived from a spore which is a product of meiotic division of spore mother cell. In angiosperms, microspore mother cells and megaspore mother cells are present. Microspore mother cells develop in an anther while megaspore mother cells develop from the nucleus of the ovule. Each of these cells in turn gives microspores and megaspores after meiotic division.

These micro and megaspores develop into male and female gametophytes respectively. The male gametophyte gives male gametes & the female gametophyte forms the egg cell. Male and female gametes (Egg) fuse to form a diploid zygote which develops into embryo in the seed. When the seed germinates, the embryo develops into sporophytic plant.

Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Enumerate the differences between asexual and sexual reproduction. Describe the types of asexual reproduction exhibited by unicellular organisms.
Answer:

Asexual ReproductionSexual Reproduction
1. Single parent is involved.1. Two parents take part in reproduction.
2. Offspring are genetically identical to each other and to their parent.2. Variation occurs in offsprings due to Genetic recombinations.
3. No fertilisation.3. Fertilisation takes place.
4. No gametes are formed.4. Gametes are involved.
5. No mixing of hereditary material.5. Mixing of hereditary material.

Asexual Reproduction in Unicellular organisms :
In Protista and Monereans, the organism or the parent cell divides into two to give rise to hew individuals. Many single celled organisms reproduce by binary fission, where a cell divides into two halves and each rapidly grows into an adult. (Euglena, Bacteria). In yeast, asexual reproduction takes place by budding, where the division is unequal. Small buds are produced that remain attached initially to the parent cell which, eventually get separated and mature into new yeast organisms.

Question 2.
Describe the post – fertilisation changes in a flower.
Answer:
After fertilisation many changes takes place in the embryo sac ovule, ovary and flower. These changes are called post fertilisation changes. The sepals, petals, stamens, styles and stigmas fall off. Ovary stores food materials and develops into a fruit. The fertilized ovules develop into seeds. The various changes that occur in the ovule are as follows :

The parts of ovule and embryo sacChanges occurring after fertilization
1. FuniculusStalk of the seed
2. Outer integumentTesta (outer seed coat)
3. Inner integumentTegmen (inner seed coat)
4. MicropyleSeed pore
5. ZygoteEmbryo
6. SynergidsDegenerate
7. AntipodalsDegenerate
8. Primary endosperm nucleusEndosperm
9. HilumScar, of the seed

Endosperm :
In majority of angiosperms, endosperm is triploid and formed after fertilisation. In gymnosperms, endosperm is haploid and formed from female gametophyte before fertilisation.

In certain plants, the developing embryo utilises the endosperm completely. The seed contains only embryo. Endosperm is absent. Such seeds are called the non-endospermic seeds or ex-albuminous seeds.
E.g. : Dolichos, Cicer, capsella etc.

In certain plants, the developing embryo utilises the endosperm partially and the seed contains some amount of endosperm. Such seeds are called the endospermic seeds at albuminous seeds.
E.g. : Ricinus, Datura, Cocos etc.

In members of Orchidaceae endosperm is not formed (Podestamaceae).

Perisperm :
As the embryo and endosperm are developing in the embryo sac, this embryosac grows by absorbing the nutrients from the nucellus. Hence Nucellus gets depleted when the seed reaches maturity. But in some seeds, some amount of nucellus is left out called perisperm.
E.g. : Seeds of Piperaceae, Nymphaeaceae, Coffee seeds etc.

Additional Question & Answer

Question 1.
Although sexual reproduction is long drawn, energy-intensive complex form of reproduction, many groups of organisms in kingdom plantae prefer this mode of reproduction. Give atleast three reasons for this.
Answer:
Sexual reproduction is a long drawn, energy Intensive, Complex and slow process as compared to asexual reproduction but Mung organisms in kingdom plantae prefer sexual reproduction because,

  1. The fusion of Male and female gametes results in offspring that are not identical to the parents or amongst themselves.
  2. Sexual reproduction gives rise to more viable variations as compared with asexual reproduction. These variations further helps plant to survive in different climatic conditions.
  3. Sexual reproduction may prove advantageous in plant defense.
  4. Seeds produced by sexual reproduction can be dispersed in more locations and grow in more favourable environments efficiently.
  5. Seed dormancy allows the plant to survive until bad environmental conditions are reversed.

Intext Questions

Question 1.
Why is reproduction essential for organisms?
Answer:
Reproduction is a vital process without which species can not survive for long. It enables the continuity of species, generation on after generation.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 6 Modes of Reproduction

Question 2.
Which is a better mode of reproduction sexual or asexual? Why?
Answer:
Sexual reproduction is better mode of reproduction because it enables creation of new variants. So that survival advantage is enhanced.

Question 3.
Why is the offspring formed by asexual reproduction referred to as clone?
Answer:
In Asexual reproduction, a single parent is capable of producing offsprings. As a result, the offspring produced are not ony identical to one another but are also exact copies of their parent so referred to as clones.

Question 4.
How does the progeny formed from asexual reproduction differ from those formed by sexual reproduction?
Answer:
The progeny formed from asexual reproduction are identical to one another and also exact copies of their parent. Their survival chance in different environments is low.

The progeny obtained from sexual reproduction are not identical to the parents. So their survival chance is enhanced. ‘

Question 5.
What is vegetative propagation? Give two suitable examples.
Answer:
It is a form of asexual reproduction in plants, in which multicellular structures become detached from the parent plant and develop into new individuals that are genetically identical to the parent plant.
Ex : Bryophyllum, Zinger, Turmeric, Colacasia, Gemmae (Liver worts)

Question 6.
Higher organisms have resorted to sexual reproduction in spite of its complexity. Why?
Answer:
Sexual reproduction varies the gene pool; as all offspring are slightly different from the parents and their ability to adapt over time is good.

Question 7.
Explain why meiosis and gametogenesis are always interlinked?
Answer:
In Angiosperms, Meiosis occurs in Microspore mother cells and Megaspore mother cells, without which male and female gametes are not formed.

Question 8.
Define external fertilisation. Mention its disadvantages.
Answer:
In Aquatic organisms, syngamy occurs outside the body of the organism. This type of gametic fusion is called external fertilisation. In this method, zygote is formed in the external medium (water).

Question 9.
Differentiate between a zoospore and a zygote.
Answer:

ZoosporeZygote
It is a motile asexual spore that uses a flagellum for locomotion. They are found in Algae, Bacteria fungi.It is a diploid cell formed by the fusion of one male gamete and one female gamete.

Activity :

Question 10.
Examine a few flowers of any cucurbit plant and try to identify the staminate and pistillate flowers. Do you know any other plant that bears unisexual flowers?
Answer:
In Cucurbitaceae family – flowers are unisexual rarely bisexual in Schizo pepon.

In All unisexual flowers, In Luffa cylindrica and Thladiantha – stamens with Monothecus anthers are present.

In Citrullus, Legenaria, Cucumis (all unisexual) stamens are three, one with Monothecus (all unisexual) stamens are three, one with Monothecus and two with Dithecous anthers. In female flowers, stamens are represented by staminodes. In Male flowers, Gynoecium is represented by Pistiollodes.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 6 Modes of Reproduction

Question 11.
What is a bisexual flower? Collect five bisexual flowers from your neighbourhood and with the help of your teacher find out their common and scientific names.
Answer:
The flower with both Androecium and Gynoecium is called bisexual flower.

  1. Hibiscus rosa – sinensis – shoe flower
  2. Gloriosa superba – Adavinabhi
  3. Datura metal – Thorn apple
  4. Dolichos lab – lab – Bean
  5. Solanum melongena – Brinjal

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Lesson 8 Ecology and Environment Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Lesson 8 Ecology and Environment

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Define the term “ecology” and its branches.
Answer:
The word ‘ecology’ was derived from the Greek terms (‘Oikos house and ‘logos’ – ‘study’) and it can be defined as “the study of the relationship of organisms with their environment”.

Question 2.
What is an ecological population?
Answer:
A population is a group of organisms of the same species living in a specific area at a specific time.

Question 3.
Define a community.
Answer:
It is an association of the interacting members of populations of different autotrophic and heterotrophic species in a particular area.

Question 4.
What is an ecosystem?
Answer:
An ecosystem is a functional unit of the biosphere in which members of the community interact among themselves and with the surrounding environment.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment

Question 5.
Distinguish between ecosystem and biome.
Answer:

EcosystemBiome
1. Level of organization above the level of the biological community landscape.1. Level of organization above the level.
2. It can be as small as an aquarium/tiny puddle.2. It occupies a vast region.
3. Functional unit of the biosphere.3. Large community of plants and animals.

Question 6.
What is a biome? Name any two biomes you studied.
Answer:
A ‘biome’ is a large community of plants and animals that occupies a vast region.
Ex: Tropical rain forest, desert, tundra (terrestrial biomes) Freshwater biomes, marine biome (aquatic biomes).

Question 7.
What is meant by ecosphere?
Answer:
It is the part of the Earth that supports ‘life’. It extends several kilometers above the Earth’s surface into the atmosphere and extends several kilometers below the ocean’s surface.

Question 8.
Explain the difference between the ‘nich’ of an organism and its ‘habitat’.
Answer:

HabitatNich
1. It is the place in which an organism lives.1. Functional role of an organism in an ecosystem.
2. It is comparable to the address of a person.2. It is comparable to the profession of a person.

Question 9.
A population has more genetically similar organisms than a biotic community. Justify the statement.
Answer:
A population is a group of organisms of the same species, living in a specific area at a specific time.
Ex: The fish belongs to the species Catla. catla living at a given time.

Question 10.
How do the fish living in Antarctic waters manage to keep their body fluids from freezing?
Answer:
During the course of millions of years of their existence, many species (fish) would have evolved a relatively constant internal (within body) environment so it permits all biochemical reactions and physiological reactions to proceed with maximal efficiency and thus, enhance the overall “fitness” of the species.

Question 11.
How does your body solve the problem of altitude sickness, when you ascend tall mountains?
Answer:
The body compensates for low oxygen availability by increasing red blood cell production and increasing the rate of breathing.

Question 12.
What is the effect of light on body pigmentation?
Answer:
Light influences the colour of the skin. The animals which live in the regions of low intensity of light have less pigmentation than the animals exposed to light.

Question 13.
Distinguish the terms phototaxis and photokinesis.
Answer:
Phototaxis is the oriented locomotion of an organism towards or away from the direction of light.
Ex: As seen in Euglena
Photokinesis is the influence of light on the non-directional movement of organisms.
Ex: Mussel crab

Question 14.
What are circadian rhythms?
Answer:
Biological rhythms that occur in a time period of 24 hours are called circadian rhythms.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment

Question 15.
What is photoperiodism?
Answer:
The response of organisms to the photoperiod is called photoperiodism.
Ex: Reproduction of flowers, migration of birds.

Question 16.
Distinguish between photoperiod and critical photoperiod.
Answer:
Photoperiod: The duration of light hours is known as a photoperiod.
Critical photoperiod: The specific day length which is essential for the initiation of seasonal events is called critical photoperiod.

Question 17.
Mention the advantages of some UV rays to us.
Answer:

  • UV radiation kills the microorganisms present on the body surface of animals.
  • UV radiation helps in the conversion of sterols present in the skin into vitamin D in mammals.

Question 18.
What is cyclomorphosis? Explain its importance in Daphnia.
Answer:
The cyclic seasonal morphological variations among certain organisms are called “Cyclomorphosis”. In the case of Daphnia, it is an adaptation to “stabilize the movement” in water and can “resist the water currents better” to stay in the water rich in food materials.

Question 19.
What are ‘regulators’?
Answer:
Organisms that are able to maintain homeostasis by physiological means which ensure constant body temperature, and constant osmotic concentration are called, “regulators”.
Ex: Mammals, Birds

Question 20.
What are conformers?
Answer:
Living organisms that cannot maintain 3 constant internal environments are described as “conformers”.

Question 21.
Define commensalism. Give one example.
Answer:
This is the interaction in which one species benefits and the other is neither harmed nor benefited.
Ex: Barnacles growing on the back of a whale benefit while the whale derives no noticeable benefit.

Question 22.
Define mutualism. Give one example.
Answer:
This is the interaction that benefits both the interacting species.
Ex: Lichens represent an intimate mutualistic relationship between a fungus and photosynthesizing algae.

Question 23.
Define amensalism. Give one example.
Answer:
Amensalism is an interaction in which one species is harmed whereas the other one is unaffected.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment

Question 24.
What is meant by interspecific competition? Give one example.
Answer:
A process in which the fitness of one species is significantly lower in the presence of another species is called interspecific competition.
Ex: Competition between visiting flamingos and resident fishes in shallow South American lakes.

Question 25.
What is camouflage? Give its significance.
Answer:
Some species of insects and frogs are cryptically coloured to avoid being detected easily by the predator. This phenomenon is called “Camouflage”.

Question 26.
What is Gause’s principle? When does it applicable?
Answer:
When the resources are limited, the competitively superior species will eventually eliminate the other species. It is relatively easy to demonstrate in laboratory experiments.

Question 27.
Name the association that exists in mycorrhiza.
Answer:
The association that exists in mycorrhiza is called “Mutualism”.

Question 28.
Distinguish between lotic and lentic habitats.
Answer:

Lotic habitatLentic habitat
The still water bodies fall under the lotic community.
Ex: Lakes, ponds
Flowing water bodies are called lentic habitats.
Ex: River, canals, streams

Question 29.
What is a zone of compensation in an aquatic ecosystem?
Answer:
The imaginary line that separates the limnetic zone from the profundal zone in a lake is called the zone of compensation (or) compensation point.

Question 30.
Distinguish between phytoplankton and zooplankton.
Answer:

Phyto planktonZooplankton
Microscopic organisms bear chlorophyll and form producers in the lakes.
Ex: Diatoms, Green algae, Euglenoids
Microscopic organisms that do not bear chlorophyll move through water currents and form primary consumer levels in the lakes.
Ex: Daphnia, rotifers and ostracods

Question 31.
Distinguish between neuston and nekton.
Answer:

NeustonNekton
The animals living at the air-water interface constitute the “neuston”.
Ex: Water strides beetles, the larva of mosquitoes.
The animals capable of swimming constitute the “nekton”.
Ex: Water scorpion, back swimmer, diving beetles.

Question 32.
What is periphyton?
Answer:
The animals that are attached to/creeping on the aquatic plants are called “periphyton”.
Ex: Water snails, hydras, nymphs of insects, etc.

Question 33.
Write three examples of man-made ecosystems.
Answer:
Cropland ecosystems, Aquaculture ponds, Aquaria.

Question 34.
What is meant by osmotrophic nutrition?
Answer:
The state of pre-digested food material through the body surface is known as osmotrophic nutrition.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment

Question 35.
Explaining the process of “leaching”.
Answer:
When the water-soluble inorganic nutrients go down into the soil and get precipitated as unavailable salts that entire process is called “leaching”.

Question 36.
What is PAR?
Answer:
PAR means “Photosynthetically Active Radiation”.

Question 37.
What is the percentage of PAR, in the incident solar radiation?
Answer:
Of the incident solar radiation, less than 50% of it is PAR.

Question 38.
Define entropy.
Answer:
As per the second law of thermodynamics, the energy dispersed is in the form of unavailable heat energy and constitutes entropy.

Question 39.
What is a standing crop?
Answer:
Each trophic level has a certain mass of living material at a particular time and it is called the “Standing crop”.

Question 40.
Explain the terms GPP and NPP.
Answer:
GPP means Gross primary productivity.
NPP means Net primary productivity.

Question 41.
Distinguish between upright and inverted ecological pyramids.
Answer:

Upright PyramidInverted Pyramid
Producers (I – trophic level Biomass) are more in number than other trophic levels.
Ex: Grazing food chain
Producers are less in number biomass than other trophic levels.
Ex: Parasitic food chain

Question 42.
Distinguish between litter and detritus.
Answer:
Litter: Litter is just like manure that is formed by dead (Either plant (or) Animal clusters) organic matter. It is the primary food source in the detritus food chain.
Detritus: It is a decaying organic matter being decomposed into detritivores organisms.

Question 43.
Distinguish between primary and secondary productivity.
Answer:

Primary ProductivitySecondary Productivity
1. The amount of biomass produced per unit area over a period of time by plants.1. The rate formation of new organic matter by consumers.
2. It can be divided into gross primary productivity (GPP), net primary productivity (NPP)2. It also can be divided into two types cross secondary productivity, and net secondary productivity.

Question 44.
Which air pollutants are chiefly responsible for acid rains?
Answer:
Sulphur dioxide (SO2) and nitrogen oxides are the major causes of acid rain.

Question 45.
What is BOD?
Answer:
BOD means Biological Oxygen Demand. It is a measure of the content of biologically degradable substances in sewage.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment

Question 46.
What is biological magnification?
Answer:
An increase in the concentration of the pollutant (or) toxicant at successive trophic levels in an aquatic food chain is called ‘Bio-magnification’.

Question 47.
Why are incinerators used in hospitals?
Answer:
Disposal of hospital wastes that contain disinfectants, harmful chemicals, and also pathogenic micro-organisms incinerators are used in hospitals.

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Considering the benefits of a constant internal environment to the organism we tend to ask ourselves why the conformers had not evolved to become regulators.
Answer:
Thermoregulation is energetically expensive for many organisms. This is particularly true in small animals like shrews and hummingbirds. Heat loss or heat gain is a function of the surface area. Since small animals have a larger surface area relative to their volume, they tend to lose body heat very fast when it is cold outside. Then they have to spend much energy to generate body heat through metabolism. This is the main reason why very small animals are rarely found in polar regions. During the course of evolution, the costs and benefits of maintaining a constant internal environment are taken into consideration. Some species have evolved the ability to regulate, but only over a limited range of environmental conditions, beyond which they simply conform.

Question 2.
The individuals who have fallen through the ice and been submerged under cold water for long periods can sometimes be revived – explain.
Answer:
Temperature variations occur with seasonal changes. These differences in the temperature form thermal layers in water. Water shows maximum density at 4°C decrease its density. Generally, during the winter season the surface water cools down in the upper water phases in the temperature reaches 0°C. below the upper icy layer, the cool water occupies the lake. The aquatic animals continue their life below the icy layer at lower temperatures the activity of bacteria and the rate of oxygen consumption by aquatic animals decrease. Hence organisms can survive below the frozen (icy) upper water without being subject to hypoxia.

Question 3.
What is summer stratification? Explain.
Answer:
During summer in temperate lakes, the density of the surface water decreases because of an increase in its temperature (21-25°C). This ‘uppermost warm layer’ of a lake is called the epilimnion. Below the epilimnion, there is a zone in which the temperature decreases at the rate of 1°C per meter in-depth, and it is called thermocline or metalimnion. The bottom layer is the hypolimnion, where water is relatively cool, stagnant, and with low oxygen content (due to the absence of photosynthetic activity).
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment SAQ Q3
During autumn (also called fall). The epilimnion cools down, and the surface water becomes heavy when the temperature is 4°C and sinks to the bottom of the lake overturns bringing about a ‘uniform temperature’ in lakes during that period, this circulation during the autumn is known as fall. The upper oxygen-rich water reaches the hypolimnion and the nutrient-rich bottom water comes to the Surface. Thus there is a uniform distribution of nutrients and oxygen in the lake.

Question 4.
What is the significance of stratification in lakes?
Answer:
Temperature variations occur with seasonal changes in temperature regions. These differences in the temperature form thermal layers in water. These phenomena are called thermal stratification.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment SAQ Q4
During autumn (also called fall), the epilimnion cools down and the surface water becomes heavy when the temperature is 4°C and sinks to the bottom of the lake. Overturns bring about uniform temperatures in lakes during that period. This circulation during autumn is known as the fall or autumn overturn. The upper oxygen-rich water reaches the hypolimnion and the nutrient-rich bottom water comes to the surface. Thus there is a uniform distribution of nutrients and oxygen in the lake. In the spring season the temperatures start rising when it reaches 4°C, the water becomes more dense and heavy and sinks to the bottom, taking oxygen-rich sinks down and bottom nutrient-rich water reaches the surface.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment

Question 5.
Explain Vant’ Hoff’s rule.
Answer:
Van’t Hoff, a Nobel Laureate in thermo chemistry proposed that, with the increase of every 10°C, the rate of metabolic activities doubles. This rule is referred to as Van’t Hoff’s rule. Van’t Hoffs rule can also be stated in reverse saying that the reaction rate is halved with the decrease of every 10°C. The effect of temperature on the rate of a reaction is expressed in terms of the temperature coefficient of the Q10 value. Q10 values are estimated by taking the ratio between the rate of a reaction at X°C and the rate of reaction at (X – 10°C). In the living systems, the Q10 value is about 2.0. If the Q10 value is 2.0, it means, for every 10°C increase, the rate of metabolism doubles.

Question 6.
Unlike mammals, reptiles cannot tolerate environmental fluctuations in temperature. How do they adapt to survive in desert conditions?
Answer:
Some organisms show behavioural responses to cope with variations in their environment. Desert lizards manage to keep their body temperature fairly constant by behavioural means. They ‘bask’ (staying in the warmth of sunlight) in the sun and absorb heat when their body temperature drops below the comfort zone, but move into the shade when the temperature starts increasing. Some species are capable of burrowing into the soil to escape from the excessive heat above the ground level.

Question 7.
How do terrestrial animals protect themselves from the danger of being dehydration of bodies?
Answer:
In the absence of an external source of water, the kangaroo rat of the North American deserts is capable of meeting all its water requirements through oxidation of its internal fat (in which water is a by-product – of metabolic water). It also has the ability to concentrate its urine, so that minimal volume of water is lost in the process of removal of its excretory products.

Question 8.
How do marine animals adapt to hypertonic seawater?
Answer:
To overcome the problem of water loss, marine fishes have glomerular kidneys with less number of nephrons. Such kidneys minimize the loss of water through urine. To compensate for water loss marine fish drink more water and along with this water, salts are added to the body fluids and disturb the internal equilibrium. To maintain salt balance (salt homeostasis) in the body they have salt-secreting chloride cells in their gills. Marine birds like seagulls and penguins eliminate salts in the form of salty fluid that drips through their nostrils. In turtles, the ducts of chloride-secreting glands open near the eyes. Some cartilaginous fishes retain urea and trimethylamine oxide (TMO) in their blood to keep the body fluids isotonic to the seawater and avoid dehydration of the body due to exosmosis.

Question 9.
Discuss the various type of adaptations in freshwater animals.
Answer:
Animals living in fresh waters have to tackle the problem of endosmosis. The osmotic pressure of freshwater is very low and that of the body fluids of freshwater organisms is much higher. So water tends to enter into bodies by endosmosis. To maintain the balance of water in the bodies, the freshwater organisms acquired several adaptations such as contractile vacuoles in the freshwater protozoans, and large glomerular kidneys in fishes, etc., They send out large quantities of urine along which some salts are also lost. To compensate for the ‘salt loss’ through urine freshwater fishes have ‘salt absorbing chloride cells’ in their gills.

The major problem in freshwater ponds is in summer most of the ponds dry up. To overcome this problem most of the freshwater protists undergo encystment. The freshwater sponges produce asexual reproductive bodies, called gemmules, to tide over the unfavourable conditions of the summer. The African lungfish Protopterus burrows into the mud and forms a gelatinous cocoon around it, to survive, in summer.

Question 10.
Compare the adaptations of animals with fresh water and seawater mode of life.
Answer:

Adaptations in freshwaterAdaptations in seawater
1. Freshwater fishes have glomerular kidneys with more nephrons.1. Marine water fishes have glomerular kidneys with a number of nephrons.
2. They send out large quantities of urine.2. They minimize the loss of water through urine.
3. To compensate for the salt loss through urine freshwater fishes have salt-absorbing chloride cells in their gills.3. To maintain salt balance in the body they have salt-secreting chloride cells.
4. They undergo encystment to overcome the problems.4. Some fishes retain urea in their blood to keep the body fluid isotonic to the seawater.

Question 11.
Distinguish between euryhaline and stenohaline animals.
Answer:

EuryhalineStenohaline
Organisms that are adapted to stand wide fluctuations in salinity are called Euryhaline animals.
Ex: Salmon fish, eel fish, etc.
Those that cannot stand wild fluctuations in salinity are known as steno haline animals.
Ex: Aromatic insects, Aromatic insects

Question 12.
Many tribes living at high altitudes in the Himalayas normally have higher red blood cell count (or) total haemoglobin than the people living in the plains. Explain?
Answer:
Some organisms possess adaptations that are physiological and allow them to respond quickly to a stressful situation. If you had ever been to any high-altitude place (e.g. > 3,500 M Rohtang pass near Manali and Manasarovar, in Tibet) you must have experienced what is called altitude sickness. Its symptoms include nausea (vomiting sense), fatigue (tiredness), and heart palpitations (abnormality in heartbeat). This is because, in the low atmospheric pressure of high altitudes, the body does not get enough oxygen. But, you gradually get acclimatized and overcome the altitude sickness. How did your body solve this problem? The body compensates for low oxygen availability by increasing red blood cell production and increasing the rate of breathing.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment

Question 13.
An orchid plant is growing on the branch of the mango tree. How do you describe this interaction between the orchid and mango tree?
Answer:
An orchid growing as an epiphyte on a mango branch gets the benefit of exposure to light, while the mango tree does not drive any noticeable benefit. So in this interaction, one species (arched) get benefitted the other (Mango) is neither armed nor benefitted. So the interactions between orchids and mango trees are commensalism.

Question 14.
Predation is not an association. Support the statement.
Answer:
Predation is not an association (it is a feeding strategy), it is an interaction between two different species. The predator gets benefits at the cost of the prey. Besides acting as) pipelines for energy transfer across trophic levels predators play other important roles. They keep the prey populations under control. In the absence of predators, the prey species could achieve very high population densities and cause instability in the ecosystem.

Question 15.
What is the biological principle behind the biological control method of managing pest insects?
Answer:
The prickly pear cactus introduced in Australia in the early 1920s caused havoc by spreading rapidly into millions of hectares of Rangel and (vast natural grasslands). Finally, the invasive cactus was brought under control only after a cactus-feeding predator (a moth) was introduced into the country. Biological control methods adopted in agricultural pest control are based on the ability of the predators to regulate prey populations.

Question 16.
Discuss competitive release.
Answer:
Another evidence for the occurrence of competition in nature comes from what is called competitive releases. Competitive release occurs when one of the two competing species is removed from an area, thereby releasing the remaining species from one of the factors that limited its distributional range dramatically when the competing species is experimentally removed. This is due to the phenomenon called competitive release, Connells field experiments showed that on the rocky sea coasts of Scotland the larger and competitively superior barnacle Balanus dominates the intertidal area, and excludes the smaller barnacle chathamalus from that zone. When the dominant one is experimentally removed, the population of the smaller one’s increases. In general, herbivores and plants appear to be more adversely affected by competition than carnivores.

Question 17.
Write a short note on the parasitic adaptations.
Answer:
In order to lead successful parasitic life, parasites evolved special adaptations such as:

  • Loss of sense organs (which are not necessary for most parasites).
  • Presence of adhesive organs such as suckers, and hooks to cling to the host’s body parts.
  • Loss of digestive system and presence of high reproductive capacity.
  • The life cycles of parasites are often complex, involving one or two intermediate hosts or vectors to facilitate the parasitization of their primary hosts.

Examples:

  • The human liver fluke depends on two intermediates (secondary) hosts (a snail and a fish) to complete its life cycle.
  • The malaria parasite needs a vector (mosquito) to spread to other hosts. The majority of the parasites harm the host: they may reduce the survival, growth, and reproduction of the host and reduce its population density. They might render the host more vulnerable to predation by making it physically weak.

Question 18.
Explain brood parasitism with a suitable example.
Answer:
Certain birds are fascinating examples of a special type of parasitism, in which the parasitic bird lays its eggs in the nest of its host and lets/allows the host incubates them. During the course of evolution, the eggs of the parasitic bird have evolved to resemble the host’s egg in size and colour to reduce the chances of the host bird detecting the foreign eggs and ejecting them from the nest.

Question 19.
How do predators act as biological control?
Answer:
The prickly pears cactus introduced in Australia in the early 1920s caused havoc by spreading rapidly into millions of hectares of Rangel and (vast natural grasslands) Finally, the invasive cactus was brought under control only after a cactus-feeding predator (a moth) was introduced into the country. Biological control methods adopted in agricultural pest control are based on the ability of the predators to regulate prey populations.

Question 20.
Write notes on the structure and functioning of an ecosystem.
Answer:
‘An ecosystem’ is a functional unit of nature, where living organisms interact among themselves and also with the surrounding physical environment.

Ecosystem varies greatly in size from a small pond to a large forest or a sea. Many ecologists regard the entire biosphere as a global ecosystem as a composite of all local ecosystems on Earth. Since this system is too big and complex to be studied at one time it is convenient to divide it into two basic categories, namely natural and artificial. The natural ecosystems include aquatic ecosystems of water and terrestrial ecosystems of the land. Both types of natural and artificial ecosystems have several subdivisions.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment SAQ Q20
The Natural Ecosystem: These are naturally occurring ecosystems and there is no role of humans in the formation of such types of ecosystems. These are categorized mainly into two types – aquatic and terrestrial ecosystems. These are man-made ecosystems such as agricultural or agroecosystems. They include cropland ecosystems, aquaculture ponds, and aquaria.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment

Question 21.
Explain the different types of aquatic ecosystems.
Answer:
Based on the salinity of water, three types of aquatic ecosystems are identified marine, fresh water, and estuarine.

  • The marine ecosystem: It is the largest of all the aquatic ecosystems. It is the most stable ecosystem.
  • Estuarine ecosystem: Estuary is the zone where the river joins the sea, and seawater ascends up into the river twice a day (effect of high tides and low tides). The salinity of water in an estuary also depends on the seasons. During the rainy season outflow of river water makes the estuary saline and the opposite occurs during the summer. Estuarine organisms are capable of withstanding the fluctuations in salinity.
  • The freshwater ecosystem: The freshwater ecosystem is the smallest aquatic ecosystem. It includes rivers, lakes, ponds, etc., It is divided into two groups the lentic and lotic. The still water bodies like ponds, lakes reservoirs, etc., fall under the category of lentic ecosystems, whereas streams, rivers, and flowing water bodies are called lotic ecosystems. The communities of the above two types are called lentic and lotic communities respectively. The study of freshwater ecosystems is called limnology.

Question 22.
Explain the different types of terrestrial ecosystems.
Answer:
The ecosystems of land are known as terrestrial ecosystems. Some examples of terrestrial ecosystems are the forest, grass, and desert.

  • The forest ecosystem: The two important types of forests seen in India are tropical rain forests and tropical deciduous forests.
  • The grassland ecosystems: These are present in the Himalayan region of India. They occupy large areas of sandy and saline soils in western Rajasthan.
  • Desert ecosystem: The areas having less than 25 cm of rainfall per year are called deserts. They have characteristic flora and fauna. The deserts can be divided into two types – hot type and cold type deserts, the desert in Rajasthan is an example of the hot type of desert. Cold-type desert is seen in Ladakh.

Question 23.
Discuss the main reason for the low productivity of the ocean.
Answer:
The Primary productivity is very low in the ocean ecosystem compared with the terrestrial ecosystem.

Unlike terrestrial ecosystems, the majority of primary production in the ocean is performed by feel living microscopic organisms called Phytoplankton, large autotrophs such as the seagrasses and macroalgae or seaweeds are generally confined to the littoral zone.

The sunlight zone of the ocean is called the photic zone or euphotic zone, it is a thin layer upto 10 to 100 m near the Ocean’s surface where there is sufficient light for photosynthesis to occur. Light is attenuated down the water column by its absorption or scattering by the water itself. Net photosynthesis in the water column is determined by the interaction between the photic zone and the mixed layer. In the deep water of the ocean (Demersal) there is no light penetration for photosynthesis.

Another factor relatively recently discovered to play a significant role in oceanic primary production is the micronutrient iron. The factors limiting primary production in the ocean are also very different from those on land. However, the availability of light, the source of energy for photosynthesis, and mineral nutrients, building the blocks for new growth, play a crucial role in regulating primary production in the ocean.

Question 24.
Explain the terms saprotrophs detritivores and mineralizers.
Answer:
Saprotrophs are microorganisms such as fungi and bacteria which live on dead organic matter. Detritivores ingest small fragments of decomposing organic materials, termed detritus mineralizers affect the mineralization of humans.

Question 25.
Define decomposition and describe the process and products of decomposition.
Answer:
When organisms die, their bodies and the waste materials passed from the bodies of living organisms form a source of energy and nutrient for the decomposer organisms like saprotrophs detritivores, and mineralizers. Saprotrophs absorb substances through the general body surface of the dead bodies. Detritivores ingest detritus as food. Mineralized mineralize humus these decomposers are referred to as micro consumers of the ecosystem. The decomposition of organic matter includes three phases. In the first phase, particulate detritus is formed by the action of saprotrophs. The second stage is the rapid action of saprotrophs and detritivores to convert detritus into humic substances. The third process is the slower mineralization of the hummus.

Decomposers also play an important role in an ecosystem by converting complex molecules of dead organisms into simpler and reusable molecules. The breakdown products of the dead organisms and waste materials are recycled in the ecosystem and are made available to the producers. The producers cannot continue to exist forever in the absence of the decomposers (as minerals are not returned to the environment).

Question 26.
Write a note on DFC. Give its significance in a terrestrial ecosystem.
Answer:
The detritus food chain (DFC) begins with dead organic matter (such as leaf litter, and bodies of dead organisms). It is made up of decomposers which are heterotrophic organisms ‘mainly’ the fungi’ and ‘bacteria’. They meet their energy and nutrient requirements by degrading dead organic matter to detritus. These are also known as saprotrophs.

Decomposers secrete digestive enzymes that break down dead and waste materials (such as feces i) into simple absorbable substances. Some examples of detritus food chains are:

  • Detritus – Earthworm – Frogs – Snakes
  • Dead animals – Flies and maggots – Frogs – Snakes

In an aquatic ecosystem. GFC is the major conduit for the energy flow. As against this, in a terrestrial ecosystem, a much larger fraction of energy flows through the detritus food chain than through the GFC. The Detritus food chain may be connected with the grazing food chain at some levels. Some of the organisms of DFC may form the prey of the GFC animals. For example, in the detritus food chain given above, the earthworms of the DFC may become the food of the birds of the GFC. It is to be understood that food chains are not ‘isolated1 always.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment

Question 27.
What is primary productivity? Give a brief description of the factors that affect primary productivity.
Answer:
Primary productivity is defined as the amount of biomass or organic matter produced per unit area over a period of time by plants, during photosynthesis. It can be divided into Gross Primary Productivity (GPP) and Net Primary Productivity (NPP).
(a) Gross Primary Productivity: Of an ecosystem is the rate of production of organic matter
during photosynthesis. A considerable amount of GPP is utilized by plants for their catabolic process (respiration).
(b) Net Primary Productivity: Gross Primary Productivity minus respiratory loss (R), is the Net Primary Productivity (NPP). On average about 20-25 percent of GPP is used for catabolic (respiratory) activity.
GPP – R = NPP
The Net Primary productivity is the biomass available for the consumption of the heterotrophs (herbivores and decomposers).

Question 28.
Define ecological pyramids and describe with examples, pyramids of numbers and biomass.
Answer:
It is a graphical representation of the trophic structure and function of an ecosystem. The base of each pyramid represents the producers of the first trophic level, while the apex represents the tertiary or top-level/top-order consumers. The three types of ecological pyramids that are usually studied are (a) pyramid of numbers (b) pyramid of biomass and (c) pyramid of energy. These pyramids were first represented by Elton, hence the name ELTONIANpyramids/Ecological pyramids.

Any calculations of energy content, biomass, or numbers have to include all organisms at that trophic level. No generalizations we make will be true if we take only a few individuals of any trophic level into account. In most ecosystems, all the pyramids – of numbers, energy, and biomass are uprights. i.e., producers are more in number and biomass than the herbivores, and herbivores are more in number and biomass than the carnivores. Also, energy (available) at a lower trophic level is always more than that at a higher level.

There are exceptions to this generalization. In the case of a parasitic food chain, the pyramid of numbers is inverted. A large tree (single producer) may support many herbivores like squirrels and fruit-eating birds. On these herbivores, many ectoparasites such as ticks, mites, and lice (secondary consumers) may live. These secondary consumers may support many more top-level consumers and also the hyper-parasites. Thus in each trophic level from the bottom to the top, the numbers of organisms increase and form an ‘inverted pyramid’ of numbers.

The pyramid of biomass in the sea is also generally inverted because the biomass of fishes far exceeds that of phytoplankton.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment SAQ Q28

Question 29.
What are the deleterious effects of depletion of ozone in the stratosphere?
Answer:
The depletion of ozone is particularly marked over the Antarctic region. This has resulted in the formation of a large area of thinned ozone layer commonly called the ‘ozone hole.

UV radiation with wavelengths shorter than that of UV-B is almost completely absorbed by Earth’s atmosphere, provided that the ozone layer is intact. But IJV-B damages DNA and may induce mutations. It causes aging of the skin, damage to skin cells, and various types of skin cancers. In the human eye, the cornea absorbs UV-B radiation, and a high dose of UV-B causes inflammation of the cornea called snow-blindness, cataract, etc., such exposure may permanently damage the cornea.

Question 30.
Describe the ‘Green House’ Effect.
Answer:
The term Green House effect’ has been derived from a phenomenon that occurs in a greenhouse. The greenhouse is a small glasshouse and is used for growing plants, especially during winter. In a greenhouse, the glass panel allows the passage of light into it but does not allow heat to escape (as it is reflected back). Therefore, the greenhouse warms up, very much like inside a car that has been parked in the sun for a few hours.

The greenhouse effect is a naturally occurring phenomenon that is responsible for heating the Earth’s surface and atmosphere. It would be surprising to know that without the greenhouse effect the average temperature of the Earth’s surface would have been chilly – 18°C rather than the present average of 15°C.

When sunlight reaches the outermost layer of the atmosphere, clouds and gases reflect about one-fourth of the incoming solar radiation and absorb some of it. Almost half of the incoming solar radiation falls on the Earth’s surface and heats it up. While a small proportion is reflected back.

Question 31.
Discuss briefly the following:
(a) Greenhouse gases
(b) Noise pollution
(c) Organic farming
(d) Municipal solid wastes
Answer:
(a) Greenhouse gases: The Earth’s surface re-emits heat in the form of infrared radiation but part of this does not escape into space as atmospheric gases (e.g. carbon dioxide, methane, etc.) absorb a major fraction of it. The molecules of these gases radiate heat energy, a major part of which again comes back to the Earth’s surface, thus heating it up once again. The above-mentioned gases- Carbon dioxide and methane are commonly known as greenhouse gases.

(b) Noise pollution: Undesirably high sounds constitute noise pollution. Sound is measured in units called decibels. The human ear is sensitive to sounds ranging from 0 to 180 dB. 0 dB is the threshold limit of hearing and 120 dB is the threshold limit for the sensation of pain in the ear. Any noise above 120 dB is considered to be noise pollution. Brief exposure to the extremely high sound level. 150 dB or more generated by jet planes while taking off may damage eardrums causing permanent hearing impairment. Even long-term exposure to a relatively higher level of noise in cities may also cause hearing impairment. Noise also causes auditory fatigue, anxiety, sleeplessness/msommaj, increased heartbeat, and altered breathing pattern thus causing considerable stress to humans.

(c) Organic farming: Integrated organic farming is a zero waste procedure, where the recycling of waste products is efficiently carried out. This allows the maximum utilization of resources and increases the efficiency of production. A method practiced by Ramesh Chandra Dagar, all these processes support one another and allow an extremely economical and sustainable venture. Natural – biogas generated in the process can be used for meeting the energy needs of the farm. Enthusiastic about spreading information and helping in the practice of integrated organic farming, Dagar has created the Haryana Kisan welfare club.

(d) Municipal Solid waste: Anything (substance/material/articles/goods) that is thrown out as waste in solid form is referred to as solid waste. The municipal solid wastes generally consist of paper, food wastes, plastics, glass, metals, rubber, leather, textile, etc., The wastes are burnt to reduce the volume of the waste. As a substitute for open-burning dumps, sanitary landfills are adopted. There is a danger of seepage of chemicals and pollutants from these landfills, which may contaminate the underground water resources.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment

Question 32.
Discuss the causes and effects of global warming. What measures need to be taken to control ‘Global warming’?
Answer:
An increase in the level of greenhouse gases has led to considerable heating of the “Earth leading to global warming. During the past century, the temperature of the earth has increased by 0.6°C most of it during the last three decades. Scientists believe that this rise in temperature is leading to severe changes in the environment. Global warming is causing climatic changes (e.g. as El Nino effect) and is also responsible for the melting of polar ice caps and other snow caps of mountains such as the Himalayas. Over many years, this will result in a rise in sea levels, all over the world, that can submerge many coastal areas. The total spectrum of changes that global warming can bring about is a subject that is still under active research.

Global warming: Control measures

  • The measures include cutting down the use of fossil fuels.
  • Improving the efficiency of energy usage.
  • Planting trees and avoiding deforestation.

Question 33.
Write critical notes on the following:
(a) Eutrophication
(b) Biological magnification
Answer:
(a) Eutrophication: Natural ageing of a lake by nutrient enrichment of its water is known as eutrophication. In a young lake, the water is cold and clear supporting little life. Gradually nutrients such as nitrates and phosphates are carried into the lake via streams, in course of time. This encourages the growth of aquatic algae and other plants. Consequently, animal life proliferates and organic matter gets deposited on the bottom of the lake. Over centuries, as silt and organic debris pile up the lake grows shallower and warmer. As a result, the aquatic organisms thriving in the cold environment are gradually replaced by warm-water organisms. Marsh plants appear by taking root in the shallow regions of the lake. Eventually, the lake gives way to large masses of floating plants (bog) and is finally converted into land.

(b) Biological magnification: Increase in the concentration of the pollutant or toxicant at successive trophic levels in an aquatic food chain is called biological magnification or Bio-magnification. This happens in the instance where a toxic substance accumulated by an organism is not metabolized or excreted and thus passes on to the next higher trophic level. This phenomenon is well known regarding DDT and mercury pollution.

As shown in the above example, the concentration of DDT is increased at successive trophic levels. Starting at a very low concentration of 0.003 PPb (PPb part per billion) in water, which ultimately reached an alarmingly high concentration of 25 ppm (ppm = parts per million) in fish-eating birds through biomagnification. High concentrations of DDT disturb calcium metabolism in birds, which causes thinning of eggshells and their premature breaking, eventually causing a decline in bird populations.

(c) Groundwater depletion and ways for its replenishment: Sewage arising from homes and hospitals may contain undesirable pathogenic microorganisms. If it is released untreated into water courses, there is a likelihood of an outbreak of serious diseases, such as dysentery, typhoid, jaundice, cholera, etc.

Untreated industrial effluents released into water bodies pollute most of the rivers, freshwater streams, etc. Effluents contain a wide variety of both inorganic and organic pollutants such as oils, greases, plastics, metallic wastes, suspended solids, and tonics. Most of them are non-degradable. Arsenic, Cadmium, Copper, Chromium, Mercury, Zinc, and Nickel are the common heavy metals discharged from industries.

Effects: Organic substances present in the water deplete the dissolved oxygen content in water by increasing the BOD (Biological Oxygen Demand) and COD (Chemical Oxygen Demand). Most of the inorganic substances render the water unit for drinking.

Removal of dissolved salts such as nitrates, phosphates, and other nutrients and toxic metal ions and organic compounds is much more difficult. Domestic sewage primarily contains biodegradable organic matter, which will be readily decomposed by the action of bacteria and other microorganisms.

Water-logging and soil salinity: Irrigation without proper drainage of water leads to water logging in the soil. Besides affecting the crops, water logging draws salt to the surface of the soil (salinization of the topsoil). The salt then is deposited as a thin crust on the land surface or starts collecting at the roots of the plants. This increased salt content is inimical (unfavourable) to the growth of crops and is extremely damaging to agriculture. Water logging and soil salinity are some of the problems that have come in the wake of the Green Revolution.

Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Write an essay on temperature as an ecological factor.
Answer:
Temperature is a measure of the intensity of heat. The temperature on land or in water is not uniform. On land, the temperature variations are more pronounced when compared to the aquatic medium because land absorbs or loses heat much more quickly than water. The temperature on land depends on seasons and the geographical area on this planet. Temperature decreases progressively when we move from the equator to the poles. Altitude also causes variations in temperature. For instance, the temperature decreases gradually as we move to the top of the mountains.

Biological effects of Temperature:
Temperature Tolerance: A few organisms can tolerate and thrive in a wide range of temperatures they are called eurythermal, but, a vast majority of organisms are restricted to a narrow range of temperatures such organisms are called stenothermal. The levels of thermal tolerance of different species determine their geographical distribution.

Temperature and Metabolism: Temperature affects the working of enzymes and through it, the basal metabolism, and other physiological functions of the organism. The temperature at which the metabolic activities occur at the climax level is called the optimum temperature. The lowest temperature at which an organism can live indefinitely is called minimum effective temperature. It an animal or plant is subjected to a temperature below the minimum effective limit, enters into a condition of inactivity called a chill coma. The metabolic rate increases with the rise of temperature from the minimum effective temperature to the optimum temperature.

The maximum temperature at which a species can live indefinitely in an active state is called maximum effective temperature, the animals enter into a ‘heat coma’. The maximum temperature varies much in different animals.

Vant Hoffs’s rule: Vant Hoff, a Nobel Laureate the thermochemistry proposed that, with the increase of every 10°C, the rate of metabolic activities doubles. This rule is referred to as the Vant Hoffs rule. Vant Hoffs’s rule can also be stated in reverse saying that the reaction rate is halved with the decrease of every 10°C. The effect of temperature on the rate of a reaction is expressed in terms of temperature coefficient or Q10 value. Q10 values are estimated by taking the ratio between the rate of a reaction at X°C and the rate of reaction at (X-10°C). In the ‘living systems’ the Q10 value is about 2.0. If the Q10 value is about 20, it means, for every 10°C increase, the rate of metabolism doubles.

Cyclomorphosis: The cyclic seasonal morphological variations among certain organisms are called cyclomorphosis. This phenomenon has been demonstrated in the Cladoceran (a subgroup of Crustacea) and Daphnia (water flea). In the winter season, the head of Daphnia is ’round’ in shape (typical or non helmet morph). With the onset of the spring season, a small ‘helmet’/’hood’ starts developing on it. The helmet attains the maximum size in summer. In ‘autumn’ the helmet starts receding. By the winter season, the head becomes round. Some scientists are of the opinion that Cyclomorphosis is a seasonal adaptation to changing densities of the water in lakes. In summer as the water is less dense Daphnia requires a larger body surface to keep floating easily. During winter the water is denser, so it does not require a larger surface area of the body to keep floating.

Temperature adaptations: Temperature adaptations in animals can be dealt with under three heads:
(a) Behavioural adaptations
(b) Morphological and Anatomical adaptations and
(c) Physiological adaptations.

(a) Behavioural adaptations: Some organisms show behavioural responses to cope with variations in their environment. Desert lizards manage to keep their body temperature fairly constant by behavioural means. They bask (staying in the warmth of sunlight) in the sun and absorb heat when their body temperature drops below the comfort zone, but move into the shade when the temperature starts increasing. Some species are capable of burrowing into the soil to escape from the excessive heat above the ground level.

(b) Morphological and anatomical adaptations: In the polar seas, aquatic mammals such as the seals have a thick layer of fat (blubber) that acts as an insulator and reduces the loss of body heat, underneath their skin. The animals which inhabit the colder regions have larger body sizes with greater mass. The body mass is useful to generate more heat. As per Bergmann’s rule mammals and other warm-blooded living in colder regions have less surface area to body volume ratio. Then their counterparts live in the tropical regions. The small surface area helps to conserve heat. For instance, the body size of American moose/Eurasian elk (Alces alces), increases with the latitudes in which they live. Moose in the northern part of Sweden show 15-20% more body moss than the same species (counterparts) living in southern Sweden.

Mammals from colder climates generally have shorter earlobes and limbs (extremities of the body) to minimize heat loss. Large earlobes and long limbs increase the surface area without changing the body volume. This is known as Allen’s rule. For instance, the polar fox, Vulpes lagopus (formerly called Alopex lagopus) has short extremities to minimize the heat loss from the body. In contrast, the desert fox has short extremities to minimize heat loss from the body. In contrast, the desert fox, Vulpes zerda, has large ear lobes and limbs to facilitate better heat loss from the body.

(c) Physiological adaptations: In most animals, all the physiological functions proceed ‘optimally’ in a narrow temperature range (in humans, it is 37°C). But there are microbes (archaebacteria) that flourish in hot springs and in some parts of deep seas, where temperatures far exceed 100°C. Many fish thrive in Antarctic waters where the temperature is always below zero. Having realized that the abiotic conditions of many habitats may vary over a time period, we now ask. How do the organisms living in such habitats manage stressful conditions?

One would expect that during the course of millions of years of their existence, many species would have evolved a relatively constant internal (within the body) environment. It permits all biochemical reactions and physiological functions to proceed with maximal efficiency and thus, enhance the overall fitness of the species. This constancy could be chiefly in terms of optimal temperature and osmotic concentration of body fluids. So the organism should try to maintain the constancy of its internal environment (homeostasis) despite varying external environmental conditions that tend to upset its homeostasis. This is achieved by the processes described below.

Thermal migration: The organism can move away temporarily from the stressful habitat to a more hospitable (comfortable) area and return when the stressful period is over. In human analogy comparison, this strategy is comparable to a person moving from Delhi to Shimla for the duration of summer. Many animals, particularly birds, during winter undertake long-distance migrations to more hospitable areas. Every winter, many places in India including the famous Keoladeo Ghana National Park (Formerly – Bharatpur bird sanctuary) in Rajastan and Pulicat Lake in Andhra Pradesh host thousands of migratory birds coming from Siberia and other extremely cold northern regions.

Diapause: Certain organisms show a delay in development, during periods of unfavourable environmental conditions and spend periods in a state of inactiveness called diapause. This dormant period in animals is a mechanism to survive extremes of temperature drought, etc. It is seen mostly in insects and embryos of some fish. Under unfavourable conditions, many zooplankton species in Lakes and ponds are known to enter diapause.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment

Question 2.
Write an essay on water as an ecological factor.
Answer:
Water is another important factor influencing the life of organisms. Life is unsustainable without water. Its availability is so limited in deserts that only certain special adaptations make it possible for them to live there. You might think that organisms living in oceans, lakes, and rivers should not face any water-related problems, but It is not true. For aquatic organisms the quality (chemical composition, pH, etc.) of water becomes important. The salt concentration is less than 5 percent in inland waters and 30-35 percent in seawater. Some organisms are tolerant to a wide range of salinities (euryhaline) but others are restricted to a narrow range (stenohaline) Many freshwater animals cannot live for long in seawater and vice versa because of the osmotic problems, they would face.

Adaptations in freshwater habitat: Animals living in freshwater have to tackle the problem of endosmosis. The osmotic pressure of freshwater is very low and that of the body fluids of freshwater organisms is much higher. So water tends to enter into bodies by endosmosis. To maintain the balance of water in the bodies, the freshwater organisms acquired several adaptations such as contractile vacuoles in the freshwater protozoans, large glomerular kidneys in fishes, etc… They send out large quantities of urine freshwater fishes have salt-absorbing ‘chloride cells’ in their gills. The major problem in freshwater ponds is – in summer most of the ponds dry up. To overcome this problem, most of the freshwater protists undergo encystment. The freshwater sponges produce asexual reproductive bodies, called gemmules to tide over the unfavorable conditions of the summer. The African lungfish, Protopterus, burrows into the mud and forms a gelatinous cocoon around it, to survive, in summer.

Adaptations in marine habitat: Seawater is high in salt content compared to that body fluids. So, marine animals continuously tend to lose water from their bodies by exosmosis and face the problem of dehydration. To overcome the problem of water loss marine fishes have glomerular kidneys with less number of nephrons. Such Kidneys minimize the loss of water through urine. To compensate for water loss marine fish drink more water, and along with this water, salts are added to the body fluids and disturb the internal equilibrium.

To maintain salt balance (salt homeostasis) in the body they have salt-secreting chloride cells in their gills. Marine birds like seagulls and penguins eliminate salts in the form of salty fluid that drips through their nostrils. In turtles, the ducts of chloride-secreting glands open near the eyes. Some cartilaginous fishes retain urea and trimethylamine oxide (TMO) in their blood to keep the body fluid isotonic to the seawater and avoid dehydration of the body due to exosmosis.

Water-related adaptations in brackish water animals: The animals of brackish water are adapted to withstand wide fluctuations in salinity. Such organisms are called euryhaline animals and those that cant with stand is known as stenohaline. The migratory fishes such as salmon and Hilsa are anadromous fishes i.e. they ‘migrate from the sea to freshwater, for breeding; Anguilla bengalensis is a catadromous fish i.e. it migrates from the river to sea, for breeding. In these fishes, their glomerular kidneys are adjusted to changing salinities. The chloride cells are adapted to excrete or absorb salts depending on the situation. On entering the river they drink more freshwater to maintain the concentration of body fluids equal to that of the surrounding water.

Water-related adaptations for terrestrial life: In the absence of an external source of water, the Kangaroo rat of the North American deserts is capable of meeting all its water requirements through oxidation of its internal fat (in which water is a by-product – of metabolic water). It also has the ability to concentrate its urine, so that minimal volume of water is lost in the process of removal of its excretory products.

Question 3.
Describe the lake as an ecosystem giving examples for the various zones and the biotic components in it.
Answer:
Deep water lakes contain three distinct zones namely

  • Littoral zone
  • Limnetic zone
  • Profundal zone

Littoral Zone: It is the shallow part of the lake closer to the shore. Light penetrates up to the bottom. It is euphotic (having good light) and has rich vegetation and a higher rate of photosynthesis, hence rich in oxygen.

Limnetic Zone: It is the open water zone away from the shore. It extends up to the effective light penetration level, vertically. The imaginary line that separates the limnetic zone from the profundal zone is known as the zone of compensation/compensation point light compensation level. It is the zone of effective light penetration. Here the rate of photosynthesis is equal to the rate of respiration. The limnetic zone has no contact with the bottom of the lake.

Profundal Zone: It is the deep water area present below the limnetic zone and beyond the depth of effective light penetration. Light is absent. Photosynthetic organisms are absent and so the water is poor in oxygen content. It includes mostly the anaerobic organisms which feed on detritus. The organisms living in lentic habitats are classified into pedantic forms, which live at the bottom of the lake and those living in the open waters of lakes, away from the shore vegetation are known as limnetic forms.

Biota (animal and plant life of a particular region) of the littoral zone: Littoral zone is rich with pedantic flora (especially up to the depth of the effective light penetration). At the shore, proper emergent vegetation is abundant with firmly fixed roots at the bottom of the lake, and shoots and leaves are exposed above the level of water. These are amphibious plants. Certain emergent rooted plants of the littoral zone are the cattails (Typha), bulrushes (Scirpus) arrowheads (Sagittaria),. Slightly deeper are the rooted plants with floating leaves, such as the water lilies (Nymphaea), Nelumbo, Trapa, etc., still deeper are the submerged plants such as Hydrilla – Chara, Potamogeton, etc… The free-floating vegetation includes pistia, Wolffia, Lemna (duckweed), Azolla, Eichhornia, etc.

The phytoplankton of the littoral zone is composed of diatoms (Coscinodiscus, Nitzschia, etc) green algae (Volvox, spirogyra, etc), euglenoids (Euglena, phacus, etc), and dinoflagellates (Gymnodinium, Cystodinium, etc ….)

Animals, the consumers of the littoral zone, are abundant in this zone of the lake, these are categorized into zooplankton, neuston, nekton, periphyton, and benthos. The Zoo-plankton of the littoral zone consists of water fleas such as Daphnia, rotizers, and ostracods.

The animals living at the air-water interface constitute the neuston. They are of two types. The epineuston and hyponeuston. Water striders (Gerris), beetles, and water bugs (Dineutes) form the epineuston/ supraneuston and the hyponeuston/infraneuston includes the larvae of mosquitoes.

The animals such as fishes, amphibians, water-snakes, terrapins, insects like water scorpion (Ranatra), back swimmer (Notonecta), diving beetles (Dytiscus), capable of swimming constitute the nekton.

The animals that are attached to/creeping on the aquatic plants, such as the ‘water snails’, nymphs of insects, bryozoans, turbellarians, hydras, etc, constitute the periphyton. The animals that rest on or move on the bottom of the lake constitute the ‘benthos’, e.g.: red annelids, chironomid larvae, crayfishes, some isopods amphipods, clams, etc.

Biota of the limnetic zone: Limnetic zone is the largest zone of a lake. It is the region of rapid variations of the level of the water, temperature, oxygen availability, etc., from time to time. The limnetic zone has autotrophs (photosynthetic plants) in abundance. The chief autotrophs of this region are the phytoplankton such as the euglenoids, diatoms, cyanobacteria, dinoflagellates, and green algae. The consumers of the limnetic zone are the zooplanktonic organisms such as the copepods, Fisher frogs, water snakes, etc., which form the limnetic nekton.

Biota of the profundal zone: It includes the organisms such as decomposers (bacteria), chironomid larvae, Chaoborus (phantom larva), red annelids, clams, etc., that are capable of living in low oxygen levels. The decomposers of this zone decompose the dead plants and animals and release nutrients that are used by the biotic communities of both littoral and limnetic zones.

The lake ecosystem performs all the functions of any ecosystem and of the biosphere as a whole, i.e., conversion of inorganic substances into organic material, with the help of the radiant solar energy by the autotrophs, consumption of the autotrophs by the heterotrophs; decomposition and mineralization of the dead matter to release them back for reuse by the autotrophs (recycling of minerals).

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment

Question 4.
Describe different types of food chains that exist in an ecosystem.
Answer:
The food energy passes from one trophic level to another trophic level mostly from the lower to higher trophic levels. When the path of food energy is ‘linear’ the components resemble the ‘links’ of a chain and it is called a ‘food chain’. Generally, a food chain ends with decomposers. The three major types of food chains in an ecosystem are the Grazing Food Chain, Parasitic Food Chain, and Detritus Food Chain.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment LAQ Q4

(i) Grazing food chain: It is also known as the predatory food chain, it begins with the green plants (producers), and the second third, and fourth trophic levels are occupied by the herbivores, primary carnivores, and secondary carnivores respectively. In some food chains, these are yet another trophic level – the climax carnivores. The number of trophic levels in food chains varies from 3 to 5 generally. Some examples from the grazing food chain (GFC) are given below.

I trophic levelII trophic levelIII trophic levelIV trophic levelV trophic level
Rosebush →Aphids →Spiders →Small birds →Hawk
Grass →Grasshopper →Frog →Snake →Hawk
Plants →Caterpillar →Lizard →Snake
Phytoplankton →Zooplankton →Fish →Bird
Grass →Goat →Man

(ii) Parasitic food chain: Some authors included the Parasitic Food Chains as a part of the GFC. As in the case of GFC’s, it also begins with the producers, the plants (directly or indirectly). However, the food energy passes from large organisms to small organisms in the parasitic chains. For instance, a tree that occupies the 1st trophic level provides shelter and food for many birds. These birds host many ectoparasites and endo parasites. Thus, unlike in the predator food chain, the path of the flow of energy includes fewer, large-sized organisms in the lower trophic levels and numerous, small-sized organisms in the successive higher trophic levels.

(iii) Detritus Food Chain: The detritus food chain (DFC) begins with dead organic matter (such as leaf litter, and bodies of dead organisms). It is made up of decomposers which are heterotrophic organisms, mainly fungi’ and ‘bacteria’. They meet their energy and nutrient requirements by degrading dead organic matter or detritus. These are also known as saprotrophs (sappro: to decompose).

Decomposers: Secrete digestive enzymes that break down dead and waste materials (such as feces) into simple absorbable substances. Some examples of detritus food chains are:

  • Detritus (formed from leaf litter) – Earthworms – Frogs – Snakes
  • Dead animals – Flies and maggots – Frogs – Snakes.

In an aquatic ecosystem, GFC is the major ‘conduit for the energy flow. As against this in a terrestrial ecosystem, a much larger fraction of energy flows through the detritus food chain than through the GFC. The Detritus food chain may be connected with the grazing food chain at some levels. Some of the organisms of DFC may form the prey of the GFC animals. For example, in the detritus food chain given above, the earthworms of the DFC may become the food of the birds of the GFC. It is to be understood that food chains are not ‘isolated’ always.

Question 5.
Give an account of the flow of energy in an ecosystem.
Answer:
Except for the deep sea hydro-thermal ecosystem, the sun is the only source of energy for all ecosystems on Earth. Of the incident solar radiation, less than 50 percent of it is photosynthetically active radiation (PAR). We know that plants and photosynthetic bacteria (autotrophs), fix the sun’s radiant energy to synthesize food from simple inorganic materials. Plants capture only 2-10 percent of the PAR and this small amount of energy sustains the entire living world. So, it is very important to know how the solar energy captured by plants flows through different organisms of an ecosystem. All heterotrophs are dependent on the producers for their food, either directly or indirectly. The law of conservation of energy is the first law of thermodynamics. It states that energy may transform from one form into another form, but it is neither created nor destroyed. The energy that reaches the earth is balanced by the energy that leaves the surface of the earth as invisible heat radiation.

The energy transfers in an ecosystem are essential for sustaining life. Without energy transfers, there could be no life and ecosystem. Living beings are the natural proliferations that depend on the continuous inflow of concentrated energy. Further, ecosystems are not exempted from the Second Law of thermodynamics. It states that no process involving energy transformation will spontaneously occur unless there is the degradation of energy. As per the second law of thermodynamics – the energy dispersed is in the form of unavailable heat energy and constitutes the entropy (energy lost or not available for work in a system).

The organisms need a constant supply of energy to synthesize the molecules they require. The transfer of energy through a food chain is known as energy flow. A constant input of mostly solar energy is the basic requirement for any ecosystem to function. The important point to note is that the amount of energy available decreases at successive trophic levels. When an organism dies, it is converted to detritus or dead biomass that serves as a source of energy for the decomposers. Organisms at each trophic level depend on those at the lower trophic level, for their energy demands.

Each trophic level has a certain mass of living material at a particular time and it is called the standing crop. The standing crop is measured as the mass of living organisms (biomass) or the number of organisms per unit area. The biomass of a species is expressed in terms of fresh or dry weight (dry weight is more accurate because water contains no usable energy).

The 10 percent Law: The 10 percent law for the transfer of energy from one trophic level to the next was introduced by Lindeman (the Founder of modern Ecosystem Ecology). According to this law, during the transfer of energy from one trophic level to the next, only about 10 percent of the energy is stored/converted as body mass/biomass. The remaining is lost during the transfer or broken down in catabolic activities (Respiration). Lindeman’s rule of trophic efficiency/Gross ecological efficiency is one of the earliest and most widely used measures of ecological efficiency. For example: If the NPP (Net Primary Production) in a plant is 100 kJ, the organic substance converted into the body mass of the herbivore which feeds on it is 10 kJ only. Similarly, the body mass of the carnivore-I is 1 kJ only.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment

Question 6.
List out the major air pollutants and describe their effects on human beings.
Answer:
Air pollutants cause injury to all living organisms. They reduce the growth and yield of crops. They are harmful to the respiratory system of humans and animals. An increase in the concentration of pollutants or duration of exposure increases the harmful effects on the organisms.
The major air pollutants:
1. Carbon monoxide (CO): It is produced mainly due to incomplete combustion of fossil fuels. Automobiles are a major cause of CO pollution in larger cities and towns. Automobile exhausts, fuels from factories, emissions from power plants, forest fires and even burning of firewood contribute to CO pollution. Haemoglobin has a greater affinity for CO and SO, and CO competitively interferes with oxygen transport. CO symptoms such aS headache and blurred vision at lower concentrations. In higher concentrations, it leads to coma and death.

2. Carbon Dioxide (CO2): Carbon dioxide is the main pollutant that is leading to global warming. Plants utilize CO2 for photosynthesis and all living organisms emit carbon dioxide in the process of respiration. With rapid urbanization, automobiles, aeroplanes, power plants, and other human activities that involve the burning of fossil fuels such as gasoline, carbon dioxide is turning out to be an important pollutant of concern.

3. Sulphur Dioxide (SO2): It is mainly produced by burning fossil fuels. Melting of sulphur ores is another important source of SO2 pollution. The metal smelting and other industrial processes also contribute to SO2 pollution. Sulfur dioxide and nitrogen oxides are the major causes of acid rains, which cause acidification of soils, lakes, and streams and also accelerated corrosion of buildings and monuments. High concentrations of sulphur dioxide (SO2) can result in breathing problems in asthmatic children and adults. Other effects associated with long-term exposure to sulphur dioxide, include respiratory illness, alterations in the lungs defenses, and aggravation of existing cardiovascular problems.

To control SO2 pollution, the emissions are filtered through scrubbers. Scrubbers are devices that are used to clean the impurities in exhaust gases. Gaseous pollutants such as SO2 are removed by scrubbers.

4. Nitrogen Oxides: Nitrogen oxides are considered to be major primary pollutants. The source is mainly automobile exhaust. The air polluted by nitrogen oxide is not only harmful to humans and animals but also dangerous for the life of plants. Nitrogen oxide pollution also results in acid rain and the formation of photochemical smog. The effect of nitrogen oxides on plants includes the occurrence of necrotic spots on the surface of leaves. Photosynthesis is affected in crop plants and the yield is reduced. Nitrogen oxides combine with volatile organic compounds by the action of sunlight to form secondary pollutants called Peroxyacetyl nitrate (PAN) which are found especially in photochemical smog. They are powerful irritants to the eyes and respiratory tract.

5. Particulate matter/Aerosols: Tiny particles of solid matter suspended in a gas or liquid constitute the particulate matter. Aerosols refer to particles and /or liquid droplets and the gas together (a system of colloidal particles dispersed in a gas) Combustion of “fossil fuels” (petrol, diesel, etc) fly ash produced in thermal plants, forest fires, cement factories, asbestos mining, and manufacturing units, spinning and ginning mills, etc., are the main sources of particulate matter pollution. According to the Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) particles of 2.5 micrometers or less in diameter are highly harmful to man and other air-breathing organisms.

An electrostatic precipitator is a widely used filter’ for removing particulate matter from the exhaust of thermal power plants. It can remove 99% of particulate matter. It has high voltage electrodes which produce a ‘corona’ that releases electrons. These are collected by collecting plates that attract charged particles. The air flowing between the plates is kept at a low velocity so as to allow the dust particles to fall. Thus clean air is released into the atmosphere.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 8 Ecology and Environment

Question 7.
What are the causes of water pollution and suggested measures for control of water pollution?
Answer:
Domestic Sewage: Sewage is the major source of water pollution in large cities and towns. It mainly consists of human and animal excreta and other waste materials. It is usually released into freshwater bodies or the sea directly. As per the regulations the sewage has to be passed through treatment plants before it is released into the water sources. Only 0.1 percent of impurities from domestic sewage are making these water sources unfit for human consumption. In the treatment of sewage, solids are easy to remove. Removal of dissolved salts such as nitrates, phosphates, and other nutrients and toxic metal ions and organic compounds is much more difficult. Domestic sewage primarily contains biodegradable organic matter, which will be readily decomposed by the action of bacteria and other microorganisms.

Biological Oxygen Demand (BOD): BOD is a measure of the content of biologically degradable substances in sewage. The organic degradable substances are broken down by microorganisms using oxygen. The demand for oxygen is measured in terms of the oxygen consumed by microorganisms over a period of 5 days (BOD 5) or seven days (BOD 7). BOD forms an index for measuring pollution load in the sewage. Microorganisms involved in the biodegradation of organic matter in water bodies consume a lot of oxygen and as a result, there is a sharp decline in dissolved oxygen causing the death of fish and other aquatic animals.

Algal blooms: The presence of large amounts of nutrients in waters also causes excessive growth of plankton algae and the phenomenon is commonly called “algal blooms1′. Algal blooms impart distinct colour to the bodies and deteriorate the quality of water. It also causes the mortality of fish. Some algae which are involved in algal blooms are toxic to human beings and animals.

Excessive growth of aquatic plants such as the common water hyacinth (Eichhornia crassipes), the world’s most problematic aquatic weed which is also called “Terror of Bengal” causes blocks in our waterways. They grow faster than our ability to remove them. They grow abundantly in eutrophic water bodies (water bodies rich in nutrients) and lead to an imbalance in the ecosystem dynamics of the water body.

Sewage arising from homes and hospitals may contain undesirable pathogenic microorganisms. If it is released untreated into water courses, there is a likelihood of an outbreak of serious diseases, such as dysentery, typhoid, jaundice, cholera, etc.

2. Industrial Effluents: Untreated industrial effluents released into water bodies pollute most of the rivers, freshwater streams, etc. Effluents contain a wide variety of both inorganic and organic pollutants such as oils, greases, plastics, metallic wastes, suspended solids, and toxins. Most of them are non-degradable. Arsenic, Cadmium, Copper, Chromium, Mercury, Zinc, and Nickel are the common heavy metals discharged from industries.

Effects: Organic substances present in the water deplete the dissolved oxygen content in water by increasing the BOD (Biological Oxygen Demand) and COD (Chemical Oxygen Demand). Most of the inorganic substances render the water unfit for drinking. Outbreaks of dysentery, typhoid, jaundice, cholera, etc., are caused by sewage pollution.

Biomagnification: Increase in the concentration of the pollutant or toxicant at successive trophic levels in an aquatic food chain is called Biological Magnification or Bio-magnification. This happens in the instances where a toxic substance accumulated by an organism is not metabolized or excreted and thus passes on to the next higher trophic level. This phenomenon is well known regarding DDT and mercury pollution.

As shown in the above example, the concentration of DDT is increased at successive trophic levels starting at a very low concentration of 0.003 ppb (ppb = parts per billion) in water, which ultimately reached an alarmingly high concentration of 25 ppm (ppm = parts per million) in fish-eating birds, through biomagnification. High concentrations of DDT disturb calcium metabolism in birds, which causes thinning of eggshells and their premature breaking, eventually causing a decline in bird populations.

Eutrophication: Natural ageing of a lake by nutrient enrichment of its water is known as eutrophication. In a young lake, the water is cold and clear, supporting little life. Gradually nutrients such as nitrates and phosphates are carried into the lake via streams, in course of time. This encourages the growth of aquatic algae and other plants. Consequently, animal life proliferates and organic debris piles up, the lake grows shallower and warmer. As a result, the aquatic organisms thriving in the cold environment are gradually replaced by warm-water organisms. Marsh plants appear by taking root in the shallow regions of the lake. Eventually, the lake gives way to large masses of floating plants (bog) and is finally covered in land.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach)

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Lesson 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach) Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Lesson 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach)

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Why do you call cockroaches a pest?
Answer:
The cockroach is a common household pest that contaminates our food with its excreta and can transmit a number of diseases.

Question 2.
Name the terga of thoracic segments of cockroaches.
Answer:
Tergum of prothorox is Pronotum.
The tergum of mesothorax is Mesonotum.
The tergum of metathorax is Metanotum.

Question 3.
What are the structures with which cockroach walks on smooth surfaces and on rough surfaces respectively?
Answer:
The claws and the arotium help in locomotion on rough surfaces whereas planulae are useful on smooth surfaces.

Question 4.
Why is the head in cockroach called hypognathous?
Answer:
It lies hinging almost a right angles to the body with the posterior wider part upwards and the mouth parts directed downwards.

Question 5.
How is a tripod formed With reference to locomotion in cockroach?
Answer:
Tripod is formed by foreleg and hind leg of one side middle leg of other side. The fore leg and hind leg of the tripod kept on the ground, pull and push the body, while the middle leg acts as a pivot.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach)

Question 6.
Name the muscles that help in elevating and depressing the wings of a cockroach.
Answer:
Wings are elevated by the contraction of dorsoventral muscles. Contraction of the dorsa longitudinal muscles depresses the muscles.

Question 7.
Name the different blood sinuses in cockroach.
Answer:
The three sinuses of haemocoel are known as
Pericardial haemocoel/Dorsal sinus
Perivisceral haemocoel/middle sinus
Perineural haemocoel/ventral sinus.

Question 8.
How are the fat bodies similar to the liver of the vertebrates?
Answer:
Fat bodies have many cells that are similar to the liver of the vertebrates in certain functions, namely
Trophocytes (store food)
Mycetocytes (contain symbiotic bacteria)
Oenocytes (secrete lipids)
Urate cells (store uric acid)

Question 9.
Which part of the gut secretes the peritrophic membrane in cockroach?
Answer:
Peritrophic membrane is secreted by the funnel like stomodel valve of the gizzard of midgut.

Question 10.
In which part of the gut of cockroach, water is reabsorbed?
Answer:
Rectum reabsorbes the water in cockroach.

Question 11.
Write the names of mouthparts in cockroach that help in biting and tasting the food.
Answer:
Mandibles helps in biting and labrum helps in tasting the food.

Question 12.
What are alary muscles?
Answer:
A services of paired triangular muscles that are present in the dorsal and ventral diaphragm.

Question 13.
What is haemocoel?
Answer:
In cockroach blood (or) haemolymph flows freely with in the body cavity (or) haemocoel.

Question 14.
The three sinuses in a cockroach are not equal in size. Why?
Answer:
The middle sinus is very large as it contains most of the viscera. The dorsal and ventral sinuses are small as they have only heart and nerve cord.

Question 15.
Why is the blood of Periplaneta called haemolymph?
Answer:
The blood of periplaneta is colourless and it consists of fluid plasma and blood cells. Hence blood of periplaneta is called haemolymph.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach)

Question 16.
What is the function of haemocytes found in the blood of Periplaneta?
Answer:
Haemocytes are phagocytic in nature. These are large in size and can ingest foreign particles.

Question 17.
Why does not the blood of Periplaneta help in respiration?
Answer:
Due to the absence of respiratory pigment the blood of cockroach can’t carry oxygen to different tissues.

Question 18.
Write important functions of blood in Periplaneta.
Answer:
1. It absorbs digest food from alimentary canal and distributes it to the rest of the body.
2. It transports secretions of the ductless glands to the target organs.

Question 19.
How many spiracles are present in cockroach? Mention their locations.
Answer:
Ten pairs of spiracles are present in cockroach.
Location: First two pairs of spiracles are present in the thoracic segments, remaining eight pairs present in first eight abdominal segments. Spiracles are located in the pleura of their respective segment.

Question 20.
What are trichomes? Write their functions.
Answer:
Trichomes are small hair-like structures of spiracles.
Function: Filtering the dust particles.

Question 21.
Why is the respiratory system of cockroaches called polytheistic and holocaustic systems?
Answer:
The spiracles of cockroaches are more in number (10 pairs) and all are functional so the respiratory system of cockroaches is called polytheistic and holocaustic systems.

Question 22.
What is intima?
Answer:
A cuticle layer that forms the inner layer of trachea is called intima.

Question 23.
During inspiration which spiracles are kept open and which are kept closed?
Answer:
Thoracic spiracles are kept open and the abdominal spiracles are kept closed.

Question 24.
Which factors regulate the opening of the spiracles?
Answer:
Opening and closing of spiracles is influenced by CO2 tension in haemolymph and oxygen tension in the trachea.

Question 25.
Inspiration in cockroach is a passive process and expiration is an active process. Justify?
Answer:
As air is drawn in due to the relaxation of the muscle inspiration is a “passive process”. Expiration involves the contraction of muscles, so it is described as active process.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach)

Question 26.
The nitrogenous wastes in Periplaneta are removed from the body through alimentary canal. Why?
Answer:
Malphigian tubules collect nitrogenous acts from the body parts and releases into alimentary canal. So these nitrogenous wastes get mixed with facel matter and sent out through anus.

Question 27.
How does the cuticle of a cockroach help in excretion?
Answer:
Some nitrogenous waste materials are deposited on the cuticle and eliminated during moulting.

Question 28.
How do fat bodies help in excretion?
Answer:
Urate cells present in these bodies are associated with excretion in a way. Those cells absorb and store uric acid.

Question 29.
What is ‘storage excretion’?
Answer:
Urate cells present in the fat bodies absorb and store uric acid throughout life. This is called “storage excretion”.

Question 30.
Which structure of the cockroach acts as a sensory and endocrine centre?
Answer:
The brain of the cockroach acts as the sensory and endocrine centre.

Question 31.
Distinguish between scolopidia and sensillae.
Answer:

ScolopidiaSensillae
Sub-cuticular units of mechano receptors of chordotonal organs.Units of cuticular receptors and chemoreceptors.

Question 32.
How is the ommatidium of cockroaches different from that of diurnal insects?
Answer:
Retinulae are present deep below the vitrallae and crystalline cone. The retinal sheath is absent.

Question 33.
Which of the abdominal ganglia is the largest and why?
Answer:
6th abdominal ganglia are the largest of all the abdominal ganglia because it is formed by the fusion of the ganglia of the 7th, 8th, 9th & 10th abdominal segments.

Question 34.
Name the structural and functional unit of the compound eye of the cockroach. How many such units are present in a single compound eye?
Answer:
Each compound eye is composed of about 2000 functional units called ommatidia.

Question 35.
Why is the brain called the principal sensory centre in cockroaches?
Answer:
The brain receives sensory impulses from various mouth parts & compound eye. Hence the brain is the principally a sensory centre.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach)

Question 36.
Distinguish between apposition image and superposition image.
Answer:

AppositionSuperposition
1. These images are formed in diurnal insects.1. These images are formed in nocturnal insects.
2. Mosaic image is formed.2. Overlapping (Blurred) image formed.
3. Vision is mosaic.3. Vision is not clear.

Question 37.
List out the characters that help in understanding the difference between male and Female cockroaches.
Answer:

MaleFemale
1. Eight terga are not visible.1. Both eighth & ninth terga are not visible.
2. Nine sterna are visible.2. Only seven sterna are visible.
3. Anal styles are present.3. Anal styles are absent.

Question 38.
What is the function of the mushroom gland in cockroaches?
Answer:
A characteristic mushroom-shaped gland is present in the 6th and 7th abdominal segments which functions as an accessory reproductive gland.

Question 39.
Compare the utriculi majors and utriculi breviores of the mushroom gland functionally.
Answer:

  • Utriculi majores forms the inner layer of the spermatophore.
  • Utriculi breviores nourish the sperms.

Question 40.
What are Phallomeres?
Answer:
Surrounding the male genital opening there are chitinous and asymmetrical structures called phallic organs/phellomeres/gonapophyses which help in copulation.

Question 41.
What is gona Pophyses?
Answer:
Surrounding the male genital opening there are chitinous and asymmetrical structures called phallic organs/phellomeres/gonapophyses which help in copulation.

Question 42.
How is the colleterial gland helpful in the reproduction of Periplaneta?
Answer:
A pair of branched colleterial glands is present behind the ovaries. These glands open into the genital pouch separately. Secretions of the two collateral glands form a hard egg case called Ootheca.

Question 43.
What is paurometabolous development?
Answer:
Gradual development (metamorphosis) through nymph stages is called “parametabolous development”.
Ex: Periplaneta

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Draw a neat labelled diagram of the mouthparts of cockroaches.
Answer:
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach) SAQ Q1

Question 2.
Describe the physiology of digestion in cockroaches.
Answer:
Food collection: The cockroach is an omnivorous insect. It feeds on all types of organic matter.

Digestion: After swallowing, the food passes through the pharynx and oesophagus and reaches the crop. In the crop, food is mixed with digestive juices that are regurgitated into it through the grooves of the gizzard. Hence, most of the food is digested in the crop. The partly digested food is filtered by the bristles of the gizzard and later it passes through the stomodeal valve into the ventricular.

The enzyme amylase of the salivary juice converts starches into disaccharides. Invertase or sucrase digests sucrose into glucose and fructose. Maltose converts maltose into glucose. The enzyme lipase digests lipids into fatty acids and glycerol. Proteases digest proteins into amino acids. The cellulose of the food is digested by the enzyme cellulose secreted by the microorganisms present in the hindgut of cockroaches. Cellulose is converted into glucose.

In the ventriculus, the digested food is absorbed. The undigested food is passed into the ileum, and colon and then reaches the rectum, where water is reabsorbed by rectal papillae. Then the remaining material is finally defecated as dry pellets, through the anus.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach)

Question 3.
Draw a neat labelled diagram of the salivary apparatus of cockroaches.
Answer:
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach) SAQ Q3

Question 4.
Describe the structure and function of the heart in Periplaneta.
Answer:
Heart: The heart lies in the pericardial hemocoel or dorsal sinus. It is a long muscular, contractile tube found along the mid-dorsal line, beneath the terga of the thorax and abdomen. It consists of 13 chambers. Every chamber opens into the other present in front of it. Three of the thirteen chambers are situated in the thorax and ten in the abdomen. Its posterior end is closed while the anterior end is continued forward as the anterior aorta. On the posterior side of each chamber, except the last, there is a pair of small apertures called ‘Ostia’ one on each side. Ostia have valves that allow the blood to pass only into the heart from the dorsal sinus.

Question 5.
Describe the process of blood circulation in Periplaneta.
Answer:
The blood flows forward in the heart by the contractions of its chambers. At the anterior end of the heart, the blood flows into the aorta and from there it enters the sinus of the head. From the head sinus, the blood flows into the perivisceral and sternal sinuses. On contraction of the alary muscles, the pericardial septum is pulled down. This increases the volume of the pericardial sinus. Hence blood flows from the perivisceral sinus into the pericardial sinus through the apertures of the pericardial septum. On relaxation of the alary muscles, the pericardial septum moves upwards to its original position. This forces the blood, to enter the chambers of the heart through the Ostia from the pericardial sinus.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach) SAQ Q5

Question 6.
How do contraction and relaxation of alary muscles help in circulation?
Answer:
The blood flows forward in the heart by the contractions of its chambers. At the anterior end of the heart, the blood flows into the aorta and from there it enters the sinus of the head. From the head sinus, the blood flows into the perivisceral and sternal sinuses. On contraction of the alary muscles, the pericardial septum is pulled down. This increases the volume of the pericardial sinus. Hence blood flows from the pericardial septum. On relaxation of the alary muscles, the pericardial septum moves upwards to its original position. This forces the blood, to enter the chamber of the heart through the Ostia from the pericardial sinus.

Question 7.
What are the different excretory organs in Periplaneta? Describe the process of excretion in detail.
Answer:
The structures associated with excretory function are Malpighian tubules, Fat bodies, uricase glands, Nephrocytes, and Cuticles.

Malpighian tubule: The malpighian tubules are long, unbranched yellowish tubules, attached at the extreme anterior end of the hindgut, lying freely in the hemolymph, but do not open into it being bliand at the free ends. They are 100-150 in number arranged in 6-8 bundles, each bundle having 15-25 tubules. Each tubule is lined by a single layer of glandular epithelium with a brush border on the inner surface. The ‘distal portion’ of the tubule is secretory and the ‘proximal part’ is absorptive in nature.

The glandular cells of the malpighian tubules absorb water salts, CO2, and nitrogenous wastes from the hemolymph and secrete them into the lumen of the tubules. The cell of the proximal part of the tubules reabsorbs water and certain inorganic salts. By the contraction of the tubules, urine is pushed into the ileum. More water is reabsorbed from it when it moves into the rectum and almost solid uric acid is excreted along with faecal matter.

The removal of nitrogenous waste material through the alimentary canal helps in the complete reabsorption of water from the wastes and the formation of dry uric acid. It is an adaptation for the conservation of water as it is very important in terrestrial organisms.

Fat bodies: Fat body is a lobed white structure. Urate cells present in these bodies are associated with excretion in a way. These cells absorb and store uric acid throughout life. This is called storage excretion as they remain stored in the cells of the corpora adipose.

Uricose glands: Uric acid is stored in uriosa gland or utriculi majority of the mushroom gland in male cockroaches. It is discharged during copulation.

Cuticle: Some nitrogenous waste materials are deposited on the cuticle and eliminated during moulting.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach)

Question 8.
How does Periplaneta conserve water? Explain it with the help of excretion in it.
Answer:
Periplaneta can conserve water by following methods. The removal of Nitrogenous waste material through the alimentary canal helps in the complete reabsorption of water from the wastes and the formation of dry uric acid. It is an adaption for the conservation of water as it is very important in terrestrial organisms.

Cuticle: Some nitrogenous waste materials are deposited on the cuticle and eliminated during moulting.

Question 9.
Draw a neat and labelled diagram of Ommatidium.
Answer:
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach) SAQ Q9

Question 10.
How can you identify the male and female cockroaches? Explain it describing the chief structures of the external and internal genitalia.
Answer:
Periplaneta is dioecious or unisexual and both the sexes have well-developed reproductive organs. Sexual dimorphism is evident both externally and internally. The female is different from the male in respect of short and broad abdomen, presence of blood pouches, and absence of anal styles.

The eighth tergum in the male and both the eighth and ninth terga in the female are not visible. In the male ninth sterna are visible, whereas in the female only the seventh sterna are visible. The seventh, eighth, and ninth sterna together form a broad pouch.

The posterior end of the abdomen is a pair of anal cerci, a pair of anal styles and gonophophyses in the males, and cerci are jointed and arise from the lateral side of the tenth tergum and are found in both sexes. The anal styles are without joints and arise from the ninth sternum. But seen only in the males. The gonopophysis are small chitinous processes arising from the ninth sternum in males and the eighth, and ninth sterna in females. They are the external genital organs.

Question 11.
Describe the male reproductive system of cockroaches.
Answer:
The male reproductive system consists of a pair of testes. These are elongated and lobed structures lying on each lateral side in the fourth to sixth abdominal segments. They are embedded in the fat bodies. From the posterior end of each testis, there starts a thin duct, the vas deferens.

The two vasa deferentia run backward and inwards to open into a wide median duct, the ductus ejaculatory in the seventh segment. A characteristic mushroom-shaped gland is present in the 6th and 7th abdominal segments which functions as an accessory reproductive gland.

The gland consists of two types of tubules:

  • Long slender tubules, the utriculi majors, or peripheral tubules.
  • Short tubules, the utriculi breviores, and secretion of utriculi majors form the inner layer of the spermatophore while the utricular breviores nourish the sperms. These tubules open into the anterior part of the ejaculatory duct.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach) SAQ Q11

Question 12.
Describe the female reproductive system of cockroaches.
Answer:
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach) SAQ Q12
The female reproductive system of Periplaneta consists of a pair of ovaries a pair of oviducts vagina, spermathecal papilla, colleterial glands, and ovaries.

A pair of large ovaries lie laterally in 2 to 6 abdominal segments. They are light yellow in colour surrounded by fat bodies. Each ovary consists of eight tubules called ovarian tubules or ovarioles. Each ovariole consists of a tapering anterior filament called germarium and a posterior wider vitellarium. The germarium contains various stages of developing ova and the vitellarium contains mature ova with the yolk. The tapering ends of the ovarioles of each ovary unite to form a single thread that attaches to the dorsal body wall.

The ovarioles, at their posterior end, unite to form a short wide oviduct. The oviducts unite to form a very short median vagina. The vertical opening of the vegina is called the female genital pore. It opens into a large genital pouch on the eighth sternum. A spermatheca or receptaculum seminis, consisting of a left-sac like and a right filamentous caecum, is present in the 6th segment which opens by a median aperture on a small spermathecal papilla in the dorsal wall of the genital pouch on the ninth sternum. In a fertile female, the spermatheca contains spermatophores, obtained during copulation.

A pair of branched colleterial glands is present behind the ovaries. These glands open into the genital pouch separately, just above the spermathecal aperture. Secretion of the two collateral glands forms a hard egg case called ootheca around the eggs.

Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Describe the digestive system of cockroaches with the help of a neat labelled diagram.
Answer:
The digestive system of cockroaches consists of an alimentary canal and the associated glands. The preoral cavity surrounded by the mouth parts is present in front of the mouth. The hypopharynx divides into two chambers called cibagium (anterior) and salivarium (posterior).

Alimentary canal: The alimentary canal of cockroaches is a long tube and is coiled in some places. It extends between the mouth and the anus. It is divided into three regions namely the foregut of stomodaeum, midgut or mesenteron, and hindgut is internally lined by ectoderm. The mesenteron is lined by the endodermal cells.

Forgut or stomodaeum: The foregut includes the pharynx oesophagus, crop, and gizzard. It is internally lined by a chitinous cuticle. The mouth opens into the pharynx, which in turn leads into a narrow tubular oesophagus. The oesophagus opens behind into a thin-walled distensible sac called a crop. The crop serves as a reservoir for storing food. Its outer surface is covered by a network of tracheae.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach) LAQ Q1
Behind the crop, there is a thick-walled muscular proven- triculus or gizzard. The chitinous inner living of the gizzard has six powerful teeth, which form an efficient grinding apparatus. Behind each tooth is a hairy pad, which bears backwardly directed bristles. Among these plates, food is thoroughly ground into fine particles. These food particles are filtered by the bristles. The gizzard thus acts both as a grinding mill and also as a sieve. There is a membranous projection of the gizzard into the mesenteron in the form of a funnel called a stomodeal valve. This valve prevents the entry (regurgitation) of food from the mesenteron back into the gizzard.

Midgut (mesenteron or ventriculus): The midgut is a short and narrow tube behind the gizzard. It is also called mesenteron or ventriculus. Between the ventriculus and the gizzard, arising from the ventriculus there are six to the eighth finger-like diverticula called nepatic caecae. They are helpful in the digestion and absorption of digested food materials. Ventriculus is functionally divided into an anterior secretory part and a posterior absorptive part.

The secretory part of the ventriculus has many gland cells and it secretes several enzymes. The ‘bolus’ of food in the mesenteron is enveloped by a chitinous and porous membrane called a peritrophic membrane, which is secreted by the funnel-like stomodeal valve of the gizzard. Digested food is absorbed into the food through the peritrophic membrane in the posterior absorptive region of the ventriculus. The peritrophic membrane protects the wall of the ventriculus from hard food particles in the food. The opening of the ventriculus into the hindgut is controlled by a sphincture muscle. It prevents entry of undigested food from the hindgut into the midgut.

Hindgut or proctodaeum: The hindgut is a long coiled tube, consisting of three regions namely the ileum, colon, and rectum. It is internally lined by the chitinous cuticle. The ileum that lies behind the mesenteron is a short tube. Six bundles of fine yellow, blind tubules called Malpighian tubules open into the ileum near the junction of mesenteron and ileum. Malpighian tubules are excretory in function. The ileum collects uric acid from the malpighian tubules and undigested food from the mesenteron. The ileum opens behind into a long coiled tube called the colon. The colon leads into a short and wide rectum which opens out through the anus. The rectum bears on its inner side six longitudinal chitinous folds called rectal papillae. They are concerned with the reabsorption of water from undigested food.

Digestive gland: The digestive glands associated with the alimentary canal of cockroaches are salivary glands, hepatic caecae, and glandular cells of the mesenteron.

Salivary glands: There is a pair of salivary glands attached to the ventrolateral sides of the crop, one on each side. Each salivary gland has two lobes. Each lobe of the salivary gland has many lobules called acini. Each acinus is a group of secretory cells called zymogen cells with a small ductule. The ductules of both the lobes of a salivary gland unite to form a common salivary duct on each side.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach) LAQ Q1.1
The two common salivary ducts are joined to form the median salivary duct. Between the two lobes of a salivary gland on each side is a sac called the salivary receptacular duct or common reservoir duct. The midious salivary duct opens into the common receptacular duct. Later these two form an efferent salivary duct. The efferent salivary duct opens at the base of the hypopharynx. Acinar cells secrete saliva, which contains a starch digesting enzymes such as amylase.

Hepatic caecae: The hepatic caecae are also termed midguts caecae. They contain secretory and absorptive cells.

Glandular cells of the mesenteron: The glandular cells of the mesenteron secrete enzymes such as maltase, invertase, proteases, and lipase.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach)

Question 2.
Describe the blood circulatory system of Periplaneta in detail and draw a neat and labelled diagram of it.
Answer:
The circulatory system helps in the transportation of digested food, hormones, etc., from one part to another in the body. Periplaneta has an open type of circulatory system as the blood or hemolymph, flows freely within the body cavity or hemocoel, Blood vessels are poorly developed and open into spaces) Visceral organs located in the hemocoel are bathed in the blood. The three main parts associated with the blood circulatory system of Periplaneta are the hemocoel, heart, and blood.

Haemocoel: The haemocoel of cockroaches is divided into three sinuses by two muscular, horizontal membranes called dorsal diaphragm or pericardial septum and ventral diaphragm. Both diaphragms have pores. There is a series of paired triangular muscles called alary muscles. Every segment has one pair of these muscles situated on the lateral sides of the body. These are attached to the pericardial septum by their broad bases and to the terga by their broad bases and to the terga by their pointed ends or apices. The three sinuses of the haemocoel are known as pericardial haemocoel or the dorsal sinus, the perivisceral haemocoel or the middle sinus, and sternal haemocoel or ventral sinus or perineural sinus. The middle sinus is very large as it contains most of the viscera. The dorsal and ventral sinuses are small as they have only the heart and nerve cords, respectively.

Heart: The heart lies in the pericardial haemocoel or dorsal sinus. It is a long muscular, contractile tube found in a long mid-dorsal line, beneath the terga of the thorax and abdomen.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach) LAQ Q2
It consists of 13 chambers. Every chamber opens into the other present in front of it. Three of the thirteen chambers are situated in the thorax and ten in the abdomen. Its posterior end is closed while the anterior end is continued forward as the anterior aorta. At the posterior side of each chamber, except the last, there is a pair of small apertures called ‘Ostia’ one on each side. Ostia have valves that allow the blood to pass only into the heart from the dorsal sinus.

Blood: The blood of Periplaneta is colourless and is called haemolymph. It consists of a fluid called plasma and free blood corpuscles or haemocytes, which are phagocytic. The phagocytic, the phagocytes are large in size and can ‘ingest’ foreign particles such as bacteria. There is no respiratory pigment in the blood and so it plays no major role in respiration.

Question 3.
Describe the respiratory system of cockroaches with the help of neat and labelled diagrams.
Answer:
Due to the absence of respiratory pigment, the blood of cockroaches is colourless and it cannot carry oxygen to different tissues. Therefore a tracheal system is developed to carry the air directly to the tissues. The respiratory system of cockroaches consists of stigmata, tracheae, and tracheoles.

Stigmata or spiracles: The tracheal system communicates with the exterior by ten pairs of openings called stigmata or spiracles. The first two pairs of spiracles are present in the thoracic segments, one pair in the mesothorax and one pair in the metathorax. The remaining eight pairs of abdominal segments.

Spiracles are located in the pleura of their respective segments. The respiratory system in insects is classified on the basis of the number and nature of spiracles. The spiracles of cockroaches are polypneustic (as they are more than 3 pairs) and holopneustic (as all of them are functional). All spiracles are valvular and each of them is surrounded by a chitinous ring called peritreme. All spiracles bear small hair-like structures called trichomes to filter the dust particles.

Each spiracle opens into a small chamber called the atrium.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach) LAQ Q3
Tracheae: From the atrium of each thoracic spiracle several horizontal tracheae run inside. They join with each other in the thorax to form many tracheal trunks like dorsal cephalic, and ventral cephalic trunks and their branches. These branches enter all organs of the head. The thoracic region also contains lateral longitudinal trunks. The abdominal spiracles lead into the atria. From the atrium of each abdominal spiracle, three tracheal tubes arise. All these tracheal tubes on one side open into three separate longitudinal tracheal trunks. They are lateral dorsal and ventral longitudinal trunks. Lateral longitudinal trunks are the longest tracheal trunks. The three pairs of longitudinal tracheal trunks on both sides are interconnected by many commissural tracheae. From all the tracheal trunks several branches are given out, which enter different organs. All tracheal branches entering an organ end in a special cell called tracheoles cell.

The wall of the tracheae is made of three layers. They are an outer basement membrane, a middle one cell thick epithelium, and an inner layer of cuticle called the intima. The intima is produced into spiral thickening called taenidia. The taenidia keep the tracheae always open and prevent it from collapsing.

Tracheoles: The terminal cell of the trachea is called tracheoblast or tracheole cell. It has several intracellular tubular extensions called tracheoles. Tracheoles are devoid of intima and taenidia. They are formed of a protein called tracheal. Tracheolar fluid is present inside the tracheoles. The level of the tracheal fluid varies with the metabolic activity of the insect. It is more when the insect is inactive and completely reabsorbed into the tissues when the insect is more active. Tracheoles penetrate the cell and are intimately associated with mitochondria (to supply oxygen to them).

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach)

Question 4.
Describe the reproductive system of Periplaneta and draw neat and labelled diagrams of it.
Answer:
Periplaneta is dioecious, or unisexual and both the sexes have well-developed reproductive organs. Sexual dimorphism is evident both externally and internally. The female is different. The female is different from the male in respect of short and broad abdomen, presence of brood pouches, and absence of anal styles.

Male Reproductive system: The male reproductive system consists of a pair of testes. These are elongated and lobed structures lying on each lateral side in the fourth to sixth abdominal segments. They are embedded in the fat bodies. From the posterior end of each testis, there starts a thin duct, the vas deferens, the two vasa deferentia run backward and inwards to open into a wide median duct, the ductus ejaculators in the seventh segment. A characteristic mushroom-shaped gland is present in the 6th and 7th abdominal segments which functions as an accessory reproductive gland.

The gland consists of two types of tubules or i, long slender tubules, the utriculi majores or periphera tubules in short tubules, the utriculi breviores secretion of utriculi majores forms the inner layer of the spermatophore while that of utriculi breviores nourishes the sperms. These tubules open into the anterior part of the ejaculatory duct. The seminal vesicles are present on the ventral surface of the ejaculatory duct. These sacs store the sperms in the form of bundles called spermatophores. The ejaculatory duct is a muscular tube that extends posteriorly and opens at the gonopore or the male genital pore.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach) LAQ Q4

Female reproductive system: The female reproductive system of Periplaneta consists of a pair of ovaries, a pair of oviducts, vagina, spermathecae, spermathecal papilla, and colleterial glands.

Ovaries: A pair of large ovaries lie laterally in 2 to 6 abdominal segments. They are light yellow in colour surrounded by fat bodies. Each ovary consists of eight tubules called ovarian tubules or ovarioles. Each ovariole consists of a tapering anterior filament germarium and a posterior wider vitellarium. The germarium contains various stages of developing ova and the vitellarium contains mature ova with the yolk.

The tapering ends of the ovarioles of each ovary unite-to form a single thread that attaches to the dorsal body wall. The ovarioles, at their posterior end, unite to form a short wide oviduct. The oviduct unite to form a very short median vagina. The vertical opening of the vagina is called the female genital pore. It opens into a large genital pouch on the eighth sternum. A spermatheca or receptaculum seminis. Consisting of a left-sac-like and a right filamentous caecum is present in the 6th segment which opens by a median aperture on a small spermathecal papilla in the dorsal wall of the genital pouch on the ninth sternum.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 7 Type Study of Periplaneta Americana (Cockroach) LAQ Q4.1
In a fertile female, the spermatheca contains spermatophores obtained during copulation. A pair of branched colleterial glands is present behind the genital pouch separately just above the spermathecal aperture, secretion of the two collateral glands forms a hard egg case called ootheca a round the eggs.

Three pairs of a plate-like chitinous structures called gonapophyses are present around the female genital aperture. These gonapophyses guide the ova into ootheca as ovipositors. These are the female external genitalia.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Lesson 6 Biology in Human Welfare Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Lesson 6 Biology in Human Welfare

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Define parasitism and justify this term.
Answer:
An intimate association between two organisms of different species in which ‘one is benefited and the other one is often adversely affected’ is called parasitism. The word parasitism comes from the Greek word ‘parasitos’ (Para-at the side of Sitos – food or grain) which means one eating at another one’s table.

Question 2.
Distinguish between a vector and a reservoir host.
Answer:

Vector hostReservoir host
It is an organism that transfers the infective stages of parasites from one host to another.
Ex: Anopheles for malaria parasite.
It is the host that lodges the infective stage of the parasite. It remains in the body till the main host is available.
Ex: Monkey for Plasmodium.

Question 3.
Distinguish between mechanical vector and biological vector.
Answer:

Mechanical vectorBiological vector
It is the vector that merely transfers the infective stages of parasites without parasitic development.
Ex: Housefly and cockroach for Entamoeba.
It is the vector in which the parasite undergoes a part of the development before it gets transferred.
Ex: Female anopheles mosquito in the case of plasmodium.

Question 4.
What is a hyperparasite? Mention the name of one hyper-parasite.
Answer:
A parasite that parasitizes another parasite is called a Hyper parasite.
Ex: Nosema notabilis (a cnidosporan) is a parasite in Sphaerospora polymorpha (a cnidosporan parasite in the urinary bladder of the toadfish).

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare

Question 5.
What do you mean by parasitic castration? Give one example.
Answer:
Some parasites cause the degeneration of gonads of the host making it sterile. This effect is called parasitic castration.
eg: Sacculina (root-headed barnacle, a crustacean) causes the degeneration of ovaries in the crab Carcinus maenas.

Question 6.
What are the endo-parasitic adaptations observed in Fasciola hepatica?
Answer:
The life cycle of Fasciola hepatica (sheep liver fluke) is very complex involving many developmental stages and two intermediate hosts to increase the chances of reaching a new definitive host.

Question 7.
Define Neoplasia. Give one example.
Answer:
Some cause abnormal growth of the host cells in a tissue to form new structures. This effect is called Neoplasia which leads to cancers.
Ex: Some Viruses.

Question 8.
Define the most accurate definition of the term ‘health’ and write any two factors that affect health.
Answer:
Health is a state of complete physical, mental and social well-being and not merely the absence of any disease or absence of physical fitness. Our health may be affected by crenetic disorders, infections, and lifestyle.

Question 9.
Distinguish between infectious and non-infectious diseases. Give two examples each.
Answer:

InfectiousNon-infectious
The diseases which are easily transmitted from one person to another are called infectious diseases. These are caused by pathogens. These are very common.
Ex: Amoebic dysentery, Malaria, Elephantiasis, Typhoid.
The diseases which are not transmitted from one person to another and are not caused by pathogens are called non-infectious diseases.
Ex: Genetic disorders, kidney problems.

Question 10.
Entamoeba histolytica is an obligatory anaerobe justify.
Answer:
Mitochondria is absent in the endoplasm of Entamoeba histolytica. The absence of mitochondria indicates the obligate anaerobic nature of Entamoeba histolytica.

Question 11.
Distinguish between the precystic stage and the cystic stage of E.histolytica.
Answer:

PrecysticCystic
(i) It is a non-feeding, non-pathogenic stage.(i) It is a feeding and infective stage.
(ii) It is small, oval, non motile form.(ii) It is found in a round shape and surrounded by a delicate membrane.

Question 12.
What is the reserve food in the precystic and early cyst stages of Entamoeba histolytica?
Answer:
The cytoplasm of the precystic stage stores glycogen granules and chromatoid bars (made of ribonucleic protein) which act as reserve food.

Question 13.
A person is suffering from bowel irregularity, abdominal pain, blood and mucus in stool, etc. Based on these symptoms, name the disease and its causative organism.
Answer:

  • The disease is Amoebiasis.
  • The causative agent is the Trophozoite of “Entamoeba histolytica”.

Question 14.
On the advice of a doctor, a patient has gone to a clinical laboratory for the examination of a sample of faeces. The lab technician, on observing the stool of the patient diagnosed that the patient was suffering from amoebiasis. Write any two characteristic features based on which the technician came to that conclusion.
Answer:

  1. Stool with blood and mucous.
  2. Presence of a tetra nucleated cyst.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare

Question 15.
Define ‘asymptomatic cyst passers’ with reference to Entamoeba histolytica.
Answer:
Some people do not exhibit any symptoms, such people are called carriers of asymptomatic cyst passers as their stand contains the tetranuclear cysts. They help in spreading the parasites to their persons.

Question 16.
What are the stages of plasmodium vivax that infect the hepatocytes of man?
Answer:
Sporozoite, Cryptozoite, Macrometacryptozoite.

Question 17.
Define the prepatent period. What is its duration in the life cycle of plasmodium vivax?
Answer:
The interval between the first entry of plasmodium into the blood in the form of sporozoites and the second entry of plasmodium into the blood in the form of Cryptozoics is called a prepatent period. It lasts approximately 8 days.

Question 18.
Define incubation period. What is its duration in the life cycle of Plasmodium vivax?
Answer:
The period between the entry of Plasmodium into the blood in the form of sporozoite and the first appearance of symptoms of malaria in man is called the incubation period which is approximately 10 to 14 days.

Question 19.
What are Schuffner’s dots? What is their significance?
Answer:
Small red coloured dots appear in the cytoplasm of the RBC known as Schuffner’s dots. These are believed to be the antigens released by the plasmodium (Malaria) parasites.

Question 20.
What are hemozoin granules? What is their significance?
Answer:
The malaria parasite digests the globin part of the ingested hemoglobin and converts the soluble heam into insoluble crystalline hemozoin. It is called the ‘malaria pigment’ which is a disposable product.

Question 21.
What is exflagellation and what are the resultant products called?
Answer:
Male gapnetes show lashing movements like flagella and get separated from the cytoplasm of microgametocyte. This process is called exflagellation and resultant products are called male (or) microgametes.

Question 22.
Why is the syngamy found in plasmodium called anisogamy?
Answer:
Since two gametes are dissimilar in size, the syngamy found in plasmodium is called anisogamy.

Question 23.
What is Ookinete? Based on the sets of chromosomes how do you describe it?
Answer:
Ookinete is a long, splendor, motile, vermiform, two sets of chromosomes are present in it. So it is described as diploid form.

Question 24.
A person is suffering from chills and shivering and high temperature. These symptoms are cyclically followed by profuse sweating and a return to normal body temperature. Based on these symptoms name the disease and its causative organism.
Answer:
The disease is malaria and the causative organism is Plasmodium vivax.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare

Question 25.
Describe the methods of biological control of mosquitoes.
Answer:
Introduction of larvivorous fishes like Gambusia, and insectivorous plants like Utricularia into the places where mosquitoes breed.

Question 26.
The eggs of Ascaris are called “mammillated eggs”. Justify it.
Answer:
Each egg of Ascaris is surrounded by a protein coat with a rippled surface. Hence the eggs of Ascaris are called “mammilated eggs”.

Question 27.
What is meant by nocturnal periodicity with reference to the life history of a nematode parasite you have studied?
Answer:
Microfilaria larvae of W.brancrofti migrate to the peripheral blood circulation during nighttime between 10 P.M – 4 A.M. This tendency is called nocturnal periodicity.

Question 28.
Distinguish between lymphadenitis and lymphangitis.
Answer:

LymphadenitisLymphangitis
Inflammation in the lymph glands is called lymphadenitis.Inflammation in the lymph vessels is called lymphangitis.

Question 29.
‘Elephantiasis is the terminal condition of filariasis’. Justify.
Answer:
Sweat glands of the skin in the affected region disintegrate and skin becomes rough so elephantiasis is the terminal condition of filariasis.

Question 30.
In which way does tobacco affect respiration? Name the alkaloid found in tobacco.
Answer:
Tobacco increases the carbon monoxide (CO) level and reduces the oxygen level in the blood. The alkaloid found in tobacco is “Nicotine”.

Question 31.
Define drug abuse.
Answer:
When drugs are used for a purpose other than medicinal use is called drug abuse.

Question 32.
From which substances ‘Smack’ and ‘coke’ are obtained?
Answer:
Smack is the common name for “Heroine”. It is obtained from the opium poppy plant. (Papaver somniferum).
Coke is the common name for “Cocaine”. It is obtained from the coca plant (Erythroxylum coca).

Question 33.
‘Many secondary metabolites of plants have medicinal properties. It is their misuse that creates problems. justify the statement with an example.
Answer:
Many secondary metabolites of plants like opioids, cannabinoids, and coca alkaloids are abused nowadays. Even though they have medicinal properties they cause some effects.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare

Question 34.
Why are cannabinoids and anabolic steroids banned in sports and games?
Answer:
These days some sports persons take drugs such as cannabinoids and anabolic steroids to enhance their performance (Doping) and abuse of such drugs also causes side effects that’s why such drugs are banned in sports and games.

Question 35.
Mention the names of any four drugs which are used as medicines to treat patients with mental illnesses like depression, insomnia, etc., that are often abused.
Answer:
Barbiturates, Amphetamines, Benzodiazepines, Lysergic aciddiethyl amides (LSD).

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What is the need for parasites to develop special adarptations? Mention some special adaptations developed by the parasites.
Answer:
Parasites have to evolve mechanisms to counteract and neutralize the host’s defence in order to be successful within the host. For this purpose, the parasites have developed many special adaptations such as the loss of unnecessary sensory organs, formation of organs for adhesion, high reproductive capacity, etc.
Parasitic adaptations: Parasites have evolved special adaptations to meet the requirements and lead successful lives in the hosts.

  • In order to live in the host, some parasites have developed structures like hooks, suckers, rostellum, etc., for anchoring, e.g: Taenia solium.
  • Some intestinal parasites have developed protective cuticles to withstand the action of the digestive enzymes of the host, e.g: Ascaris lumbricoides.
  • Some intestinal parasites produce anti enzymes to neutralize the effect of the host’s digestive enzymes, e.g: Taenia solium.
  • Some parasites live as obligatory anaerobes as the availability of oxygen is very rare for them, e.g: Entamoeba histolytica, Taenia solium, etc.
  • Some intestinal parasites live as facultative anaerobes, i.e., if oxygen is not available, they live anaerobically and if oxygen is available, they respire aerobically, e.g: Ascaris lumbricoides.

Question 2.
Distinguish between hypertrophy and hyperplasia with an example for each.
Answer:

HypertrophyHyperplasia
It is an abnormal increase in the volume/size of the infected host cell caused by a parasite.
e.g: R.B.C of a man infected by plasmodium.
It is an increase in the number of cells caused by parasites.
e.g: Fasciola hepatica in the bile duct of sheep.

Question 3.
Describe the structure of a trophozoite of Entamoeba histolytica.
Answer:
It is the most active, motile, feeding, and pathogenic stage that lives in the mucosa of the large intestine. It moves with the help of pseudopodium (lobopodium) which is produced anteriorly. The body of the trophozoite is surrounded by plasmalemma. Its cytoplasm is differentiated into an outer clear, viscous, non-granular ectoplasm and inner fluid-like granular, endoplasm.

Ribosomes, food vacuoles, and verticular cartwheel-shaped nucleus is present Absence of mitochondria indicates the obligate anaerobic nature of Entamoeba histolytica. It produces a proteolytic enzyme called histolytica which dissolves mucosas & sub-mucosa of the gut wall & releases blood, and tissue debris which are ingested by the trophozoite.

Hence food vacuoles are loaded with R.B.C & fragments of cells, and bacteria. The presence of R.B.C in the food vacuole and cart wheel-shaped nucleus are the characteristic features of the trophozoite.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare

Question 4.
Explain the life cycle of Entamoeba histolytica.
Answer:
The trophozoite undergoes binary fissions in the wall of the large intestine and produces a number of daughter entamoeba. They feed upon the bacteria and the hostly tissue elements, grow in size, and again multiply. After repeated binary fissions some of the young ones enter the lumen of the large intestine and transform into precystic stage.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare SAQ Q4
Here, the precystic stage transforms into the cystic stage. Which in turn develops into tetranuclear cysts. The entire process is completed only in a few hours. These tetra nucleated cysts come out along with the faecal matter and can remain alive for about 10 days. These cysts reach new hosts through contaminated food and water. They pass into the small intestine of a new human host. Where the cyst wall gets, ruptured by the action of the enzyme trypsin releasing tetra nucleated amoeba. Such tetra nucleated exocyst amoeba is called metacyst. The four nuclei of the metacyst undergo mitotic divisions and produce eight nuclei. Each nucleus gets a bit of cytoplasm and thus eight daughter entamoeba are produced. The young ones develop into trophozoites and invade the large intestine.

Question 5.
Write a short note on the pathogenicity of Entamoeba histolytica.
Answer:
The trophozoites ‘dissolve’ the mucosal lining by histolysin going deep into the submucosa and causing ulcers. These ulcers contain cellular debris, lymphocytes, blood corpuscles, and bacteria. It leads to the formation of abscesses in the wall of the large intestine. Ultimately it results in stools with blood and mucous. This condition is called amoebic dysentery (or) Intestinal amoebiasis. Some people don’t exhibit any symptoms such people are called ‘carriers’ (or) asymptomatic cyst passers as their stools contain tetranucleotide cysts.

Question 6.
Describe the structure of the sporozoite of plasmodium vivax.
Answer:
The ultrastructure of the sporozoite of P. vivax was studied by barnham. It is sickle-shaped with a swollen middle part and pointed at both ends of it’s body. It measures about 15 microns in length and one micron in width. The body is covered by an elastic pellicle with microtubules which help in the curiggling movement of the sporozoite. The cytoplasm contains cell organelles such as the Golgi complex, E.R. mitochondria, and a nucleus.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare SAQ Q6
The cytoplasm also shows many convoluted tubules of unknown function throughout the body. It contains a cup-like depression called an apical cup at the anterior end into which a pair of secretory organelles opens. They secrete a cytolytic enzyme which helps in the penetration of sporozoite into the liver cell.

Question 7.
Describe the cycle of Golgi in the life history of Plasmodium Vivax.
Answer:
It was first described by Camillo Golgi. Hence it is also called the Golgi cycle. This is initiated either by the trophozoites of the pre-erythrocytic cycle (or) the micro meta cryptozoites of the exo-erythrocytic cycle. In the fresh R.B.C, these stages assume the spherical shape and transform into trophozoite. It develops a small vacuole that gradually enlarges in size, and pushes the cytoplasm and nucleus to the periphery.

Now the plasmodium looks like a finger ring. Hence this stage is called the signet ring stage soon it loses the vacuole, develops pseudopodia, and becomes an amoeboid stage. With the help of pseudopodium, it actively feeds on the content of the R.B.C and increases in size. As a result, the R.B.C grows almost double the size. This process is called hypertrophy. The malaria parasite digests the globin part of the ingested hemoglobin and converts the soluble haem into insoluble Haemozine. It is called malaria pigment. During this stage, small red coloured dots appear in the cytoplasm of R.B.C known as “Schuffner’s dots’.

Now the parasite loses the pseudopodia and increases in size finally it occupies the entire R.B.C and becomes schizont. It undergoes schizogony and produces 12-24 erythrocytic merozoites. They are arranged in the form of a rose hence this stage is called the rosette stage. Finally, merozoites are released along with haemozoine into the blood.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare

Question 8.
Explain the pathogenicity of Wucheria bancrofti in Man.
Answer:
The infection causes filarial fever which is characterized by headache, mental depression, and an increase in the body temperature. In general, the infection of filarial worm causes inflammation effect in lymph vessels and lymph glands. Inflammation in the lymph vessels is called lymphangitis and that of lymph glands is called lymphadenitis. In the case of heavy infection, the accumulation of dead worms blocks the lymph vessels and lymph glands resulting in immense swelling of limbs, scrotum of males, and mammary glands in females. Fibroblasts accumulate in this tissue and form the fibrous tissue. In severe cases, the sweat glands of the skin in the affected region disintegrate and the skin becomes rough. This terminal condition is called elephantiasis.

Question 9.
Write short notes on typhoid fever and its prophylaxis.
Answer:
Typhoid fever: It is caused by salmonella typhi which is a gram-negative bacterium. It mainly lives in the small intestine of man and then migrates to other organs through blood. It can be confirmed by the Widal test.
Mode of infection: Contamination through food and water.
Symptoms: Sustained fever with high temperature upto 104°F. weakness, stomach pain, constipation, headache, and loss of appetite. Intestinal perforation and death may also occur in severe cases.
Prophylaxis: Advancements made in biological science have armed us to deal with many infections effectively. The immunization programme by the use of vaccines has enabled us to completely irradicate like typhoid. Biotechnology is making available never cheaper vaccines, and the discovery of antibiotics and various other drugs also enabled us to treat typhoid.

Question 10.
Write short notes on Pneumonia and its prophylaxis.
Answer:
Pneumonia: It is caused by gram-positive bacteria such as Streptococcus pneumonia and Haemophilus influenza. They infect the alveoli of the lungs in human beings.
Mode of infection: Contamination by inhaling the droplets/aerosols released by an infected person or even by sharing the utensils with an infected person.
Symptoms: The alveoli get filled with fluid leading to severe problems in respiration. In severe cases, the lips and fingernails may turn gray to bluish in colour.
Prophylaxis: Advancements made in biological science have armed us to deal with many infections effectively. The immunization programme by the use of vaccines has enabled us to completely irradicate pneumonia. Biotechnology is making available newer, cheaper vaccines, and the discovery of antibiotics and various other drugs also enabled us to treat pneumonia.

Question 11.
Write short notes on the common cold and its prophylaxis.
Answer:
Common cold: It is caused by a rhinovirus group of viruses. They infect the nose and respiratory passage but not the lungs.
Mode of infection: Contamination is by direct inhalation of the droplets resulting from cough or sneezes of an infected person or indirectly through contaminated objects such as pens, books, cups, door knobs, computer keyboards or mice, etc.
Symptoms: Nasal congestion, discharge from the nose, sore throat, hoar senses, cough, headache, tiredness, etc., which usually last for 3-7 days.
Prophylaxis: Advancements made in biological science have armed to deal with many infections effectively. The immunization programme by the use of vaccines has enabled us to completely irradicate like viral diseases common cold. Biotechnology is making available newer cheaper vaccines, the discovery of antibiotics and various other drugs also enabled use to treat viral diseases like the common cold.

Question 12.
Write short notes on ‘ringworm’ and its prophylaxis.
Answer:
Ringworm: It is one of the most common infectious diseases in man. It is caused by many fungi belonging to the genera, Microsporum, Trichophyton, and Epidermophyton. Heat and moisture help these fungi grow in the skin folds such as those in the groin or between the toes.
Mode of infection: Contamination is by using towels, clothes or combs of the infected persons or even from the soil.
Symptoms: Appearance of dry, scaly, usually round lesions accompanied by intense itching on various parts of the body such as skin, nails, and scalp.

Question 13.
What are the adverse effects of tobacco?
Answer:
Effect: Smoking increases the carbon monoxide (CO) level and reduces the oxygen level in the blood. Nicotine stimulates the adrenal gland to release adrenaline and nor-adrenaline into the blood. These hormones raise blood pressure and increase the heart rate. Smoking is associated with bronchitis, emphysema, coronary heart disease, and gastric ulcer and increases the incidence of cancers of the throat, lungs, urinary bladder, etc. Smoking also paves the way to hard drugs. Yet smoking is very prevalent in society, both among young and old-. Tobacco chewing is associated with an increased risk of cancer of the oral cavity.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare

Question 14.
Write short notes on opioids.
Answer:
Opioids: These are the drugs obtained from the opium poppy plant Papaver somniferous (vernacular name: Nallamandu mokka): They bind to specific opioid receptors present in our central nervous system and gastrointestinal tract. Some of them are morphine, heroin, etc.
Morphine: It is extracted from the dried latex of the unripe seed capsule (Pod) of the poppy plant. It occurs as colourless crystals or a white crystalline powder.
Mode of abuse: Generally it is taken orally or by injection.
Effect: It is effective as a sedative and painkiller. It is very useful in patients who have undergone surgery.
Heroin: It is a white, bitter, odourless, and crystalline compound, obtained by the acetylation of morphine. Chemically it is diacetylmorphine. It is commonly called a snack.
Mode of abuse: Generally it is taken by shorting and injection.
Effect: Heroin is a depressant and slows down body functions.

Question 15.
Write short notes on Cannabinoids.
Answer:
Cannabinoids: These are a group of chemicals obtained from the Indian temp, plant cannabis Sativa (vernacular name Ganjai mokka). They interact with cannabinoid receptors present in the brain. The flower tops, leaves, and the resin of this plant are used in various combinations to produce marijuana, hashish, charas, and ganja. These daufs, cannabinoids are being abused by even some sports – persons (doping).
Mode of abuse: These are generally taken by inhalation and oral ingestion.
Effect: Show their effects on the cardiovascular system of the body.

Question 16.
Write short notes on Cocaine.
Answer:
Coca alkaloid or cocaine: It is a white, crystalline alkaloid that is obtained from the leaves of the coca plant Erythroxylum coca, native to South America. It is commonly called coke or crack.
Mode of abuse: It is usually shorted.
Effect: It has a potent stimulating action on the central nervous system as it interferes with the transport of the neurotransmitter dopamine. Hence it produces a sense of euphoria and increased energy. Its excessive dosage causes hallucinations.

Question 17.
Why adolescence is considered a vulnerable phase?
Answer:
Adolescence: It is the time period between the beginning of puberty and the beginning of adulthood. In other words. It is the bridge linking childhood and adulthood. The age between 12-18 years is considered adolescence period. It is both a period and process during which a child becomes muture. It is accompanied by several biological and behavioural changes. Thus, adolescence is a very vulnerable phase of the mental and psychological development of an individual.

Question 18.
Distinguish between addiction and dependence.
Answer:
Addiction: It is a psychological attachment to certain effects such as euphoria. The most important thing one fails to realize it, the inherent addictive nature of tobacco, drugs, and alcohol, with the repeated use of TDA, the tolerance level of the receptors present in our body increases. Consequently, the receptors respond only to higher doses leading to greater intake and addiction. However, it should be clearly borne in mind that the use of TDA even once, can be a forerunner to addiction. Thus, the addictive potential of tobacco, drugs, and alcohol pull the users into a vicious circle leading to their regular use (abuse) from which they may not be able to get out. In the absence of any guidance or counseling, people get addicted and become dependent on them.

Dependence: It is the tendency of the body of manifest a characteristic unpleasant condition (withdrawal syndrome). The regular dose of drugs or alcohol is abruptly discontinued. The withdrawal syndrome is characterized by anxiety. Shakiness (tremors), nausea, and sweating may be relieved when regular use is resumed again. Dependence leads the patients to ignore all social norms.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare

Question 19.
‘Prevention is better than cure. justify with regard to TDA abuse.
Answer:
The age-old adage of prevention is better than cure holds true here also.
Some of the measures successful in the prevention and control of TDA abuse among adolescents are:

  • Avoid undue parental pressure: Every child has his/her own choice. Capacity and personality. Parents should not force their children to perform beyond their capacity by comparing them with others in studies, games, etc.
  • Responsibility of parents and teachers: They should look for the danger signs and counsel such students who are likely to get into the ‘trap’.
  • Seeking help from peers: If peers find someone abusing drugs or alcohol immediately it should be brought to the notice of their parents or teachers so that they can guide them appropriately.
  • Education and counseling: Educating and counseling the children to face problems, stress, and failures as a part of life.
  • Seeking professional and medical help: A lot of help is available in the form of highly qualified psychologists, psychiatrists, and de-addiction and rehabilitation programmers.

Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Explain the structure and life cycle of Entamoeba histolytica with the help of neat and labelled diagrams.
Answer:
Entamoeba histolytica (Gr. entos – within : amoiba – change histos – tissues ; lysis – dissolve) is a microscopic and monogenetic parasite that inhabits the large intestine and causes amoebic dysentery or amoebiasis in man.

It is cosmopolitan in distribution but more common in the tropical and subtropical regions of the world. It is common in the people of rural and densely populated urban areas wherever the hygienic conditions are poor.

Structure: Entamoeba histolytica passes through three distinct stages in its life cycle namely

  • Trophozoite stage
  • Precystic stage
  • Cystic stage

(i) Trophozoit stage: It is the most active, motile, feeding, and pathogenic stage that lives in the mucosa and sub-mucosa membrane of the large intestine; It moves with the help of a lobopodium which is produced anteriorly. The body of the trophozoite is surrounded by plasma-lemma. Its cytoplasm is differentiated into outer clear, viscous non-granular ectoplasm and inner fluid like granular endoplasm.

Ribosomes, food vacuoles, and vesicular, cartwheel-shaped nuclei are present in the endoplasm. The absence of mitochondria indicates the obligate anaerobic nature of Entamoeba histolytica. It produces the proteolytic enzyme called histolysis due to which the species name histolytica was assigned to it. Due to the effect of this enzyme the mucosa and submucosa of the gut wall are dissolved releasing some amount of blood, and tissue debris that are ingested by the trophozoites. Hence the food vacuoles are with erythrocyte fragments of epithelial cells and bacteria. The presence of RBC in food vacuoles and cartwheel-shaped nuclei are the characteristic features of the trophozoites of Entamoeba histolytic.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare LAQ Q1

(ii) Precystic stage: It is the non-feeding and non-pathogenic stage of Entamoeba histolytica that is found in the lumen of the large intestine. It is a small, spherical, or oval, non-motileform. The cytoplasm of the precystic stage stores glycogen granules and chromatid bars (made of ribonucleic protein) which act as reserve food.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare LAQ Q1.1

(iii) Cystic stage: It is round in shape and is surrounded by a thin, delicate, and highly resistant cyst wall. It is found in the lumen of the large intestine. The process of development of the cyst wall is called encystation. Which is a means of tiding over the un¬favourable conditions that the parasite is going to encounter while passing to a new host. Soon after the encystation, the nucleus undergoes two successive mitotic divisions to form four daughter nuclei. This type of cystic stage is called tetranuclear cyst or mature cyst which is the stage infective to man.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare LAQ Q1.2

Life cycle: The trophozoites undergo binary fissions in the wall of the large intestine and produce a number of daughter entamoeba. They feed upon the bacteria and the host’s tissue elements, grow in size, and again multiply. After repeated binary fission some of the young ones enter of the lumen of the large intestine and transform into precystic stages. Here, the precystic stages transform into cystic stages which in turn develop into tetranuclear cysts. The entire process is completed only in a few hours. These tetranuclear cysts come out along with the faecal matter and can remain alive for about 10 days. The cyst reaches a new host through contaminated food and water. In the small intestine of a new human host, the cyst wall gets ruptured releasing the tetranuclear amoebae. Such tetranuclear excystic amoebae are called metacysts.

The four nuclei of the metacyst undergo mitotic divisions and produce eight nuclei. Each nucleus gets a bit of the cytoplasm and thus eight daughter entamoeba or metacystic trophozoites are produced. These young ones develop into feeding stages called trophozoites. They invade the mucous membrane of the large intestine and grow into mature trophozoites.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare LAQ Q1.3

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare

Question 2.
Describe the life cycle of plasmodium vivax in man.
Answer:
The life cycle of plasmodium in man (The human phase): In man, the plasmodium reproduces by asexual reproduction called schizogony. It occurs in liver cells (hepatocytes) as well as in RBC. In liver cells, it is called hepatic schizogony and in RBC it is called erythrocytic schizogony.

Hepatic Schizogony: This was discovered by short and Cranham. Whenever a mosquito infected by plasmodium bites a man, nearly 2000 sporozoites are released into the blood of man through its saliva, within half an hour, they reach the hepatocytes where they undergo pre-erythrocytic and exo-erythrocytic cycles.

Pre-erythrocytic cycle: Whenever the sporozoites enter the liver cells they transform into trophozoites. They feed on the contents of the hepatic cells, assume a spherical shape, and attain the maximum size. This stage is called the schizont stage. Its nucleus divides several times Mitotically, followed by the cytoplasmic divisions resulting in approximately 12,000 daughter individuals called cryptozoites or the 1st generation merozoites. They enter the sinusoids of the liver by rupturing the cell membrane of the schizont and the liver cells. This entire process is completed approximately in 8 days. Now, these first-generation merozoites have two options, i.e., they can enter either fresh liver cells and continue the exo-erythrocytic cycle or they can enter RBC and continue the erythrocytic cycle.

Exo-erythrocytic cycle: If the trophozoites enter the fresh liver cells, they undergo changes similar to that of the pre-erythrocytic cycle and produce the second generation merozoites called meta cryptozoites. These are of two types the smaller micro-metacryptozoites and larger macro-metacry- photosites. This entire process is completed approximately in two days. The macro-metacryptozoites attack fresh liver cells and continue another exo-erythrocytic cycle, whereas the micro-metacryptozoites always enter the bloodstream and attack fresh RBC to continue the erythrocytic cycle.

Prepatent period: The interval between the first entry of plasmodium into the blood in the form of sporozoites and the second entry of plasmodium into the blood in the form of Cryptozoic is called a prepatent period. It lasts approximately 8 days. During this period, the host does not show any clinical symptoms of the disease. It is only a means of multiplication.

Erythrocytic cycle: It was first described by Camillo Golgi Hence it is also called Golgi cycle. This cycle is initiated either by the trophozoites of the pre-erythrocytic cycle or the micro metocryptozoites of the exo-erythrocytic cycle in the fresh RBC, these stages assume the spherical shape and transform into trophozoites. It develops a small vacuole that gradually enlarges in size pushing the cytoplasm and nucleus to the periphery.

Now the plasmodium looks like a fisher ring. Hence this stage is called the signet ring stage. Soon it loses the vacuole, develops pseudopodia, and becomes an amoeboid stage with the help of pseudopodia. It actively feeds on the contents of the RBC and increases in size. As a result, the RBC grows almost double its size. This process is called hypertrophy. The malaria parasite digests the globin part of the ingested hemoglobin and converts the soluble haem into insoluble crystalline haemozoin. It is called the ‘malaria pigment’ which is called a disposable product. During this stage, small red coloured dots appear in the cytoplasm of the RBC known as Schaffner’s dots. These are believed to be the antigens released by the parasite.

Now the plasmodium loses the pseudopodia, further increases in size, occupies the entire RBC, and becomes a schizont. It undergoes schizogony similar to that of the pre-erythrocytic cycle and produces 12 to 24 erythrocytic merozoites. They are arranged in the form of the petals of a rose in the RBC. Hence this stage is called the rosette stage] Finally the erythrocyte bursts and releases the merozoites along with haemozoin into the blood. This cycle is completed approximately in 48 hours.

Incubation period: The period between the entry of plasmodium into the blood in the form of sporozoite and the first appearance of symptoms of malaria in man is called the incubation period, which is approximately 10 to 14 days.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare LAQ Q2
Formation of gametocytes: After repeated cycles of erythrocytic schizogony when the number of fresh RBC decreases, some merozoites enter the RBC and transform into gametocytes instead of continuing the erythrocytic cycle. This process generally takes place when the RBCs are present in the spleen and bone marrow.

The gametocytes are of two types namely smaller microgametocytes or male gametocytes and larger macrogametocytes or female gametocytes. The gametocytes cannot undergo further development in man as the temperature and PH of the blood man are not suitable for further development. These gametocytes reach the blood circulation and wait to reach the next host. They degenerate and die if they are not transferred to mosquitoes within a week.

Question 3.
Describe the life cycle of plasmodium vivax in mosquitoes.
Answer:
Life cycle of plasmodium in mosquito (The mosquito phase) Ross cycle: When a female Anopheles mosquito bite and sucks the blood of a malaria patient the gametocytes along with the other stages of the erythrocytic cycle reach the crop of mosquito. Here all the stages are digested except the gametocytes. Further part of the life cycle consists of

  • Gametogony
  • Fertilization
  • Formation of ookinete & oocysts
  • Sporogony

(i) Gametogony: The formation of male and female gametes from the gametocytes is called gametogony. It occurs in the lumen of the crop of mosquitoes.

Formation of male gametes: During this process, the nucleus of the microgametocyte divides into eight daughter nuclei called pronuclei which reach the periphery. The cytoplasm is pushed out in the form of eight flagella-like processes. Into each flagellum-like process, one pronucleus enters and forms a micro gamete or male gamete. These male gametes show lashing movements like flagella and get separated from the cytoplasm of microgametocyte. This process is called exflagellation.

Formation of female gamete: The female gametocyte undergoes a few changes and transforms into a female gamete. This process is called maturation. The nucleus of the female gamete moves towards the periphery and the cytoplasm at that point forms a projection. This projected region is called the fertilization cone.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare LAQ Q3

Fertilization: The fusion of male and female gametes is called fertilization. It also occurs in the lumen of the crop of the mosquito. When an actively moving male gamete comes into contact with the fertilization cone of the female gamete, it enters it, and the pronuclei and cytoplasm of these two gametes fuse with each other, resulting in the formation of a synkaryon Since the two gametes are dissimilar in size this process is known as anisogamy. The female gamete that bears the synkaryon is called the zygote which is round and non-motile.

(iii) Formation of ookinete and oocysts: The zygote remains inactive for some time and then transforms into a long, slender, motile, vermiform ookinete or vermicule within 18 to 24 hours. It pierces the wall of the crop and settles beneath the basement membrane. It becomes round and secretes a cyst around its body. This encysted ookinete is now called an oocyst. About 50 to 500 oocysts are formed on the wall of the crop and appear in the form of small nodules.

(iv) Sporogony: The formation of sporozoites in the oocysts is called sporogony. According to Bano, the nucleus of the oocyst first undergoes reduction division followed by repeated mitotic divisions resulting in the formation of about 1,000 daughter nuclei. Each bit of the nucleus is surrounded by a little bit of the cytoplasm and transforms into a sickle-shaped sporozoite. Oocyst with such sporozoites is called sporocyst.

When this sporocyst raptures, the sporozoites are liberated into the haemocoel of the mosquito. From there, they travel into the salivary glands and are ready for infection. The life cycle of plasmodium in mosquitoes completes in about 10 to 24 days.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare

Question 4.
Describe the structure and life cycle of Ascaris lumbricoides with the help of a neat and labelled diagram.
Answer:
Ascaris lumbricoides is commonly called the common roundworm. It lives in the small intestine of man, more frequently in children. It is cosmopolitan in distribution. The mode of infection is through contaminated food and water. The infective stage is the embryonated: egg with the 2nd stage rhabditiform larva.

Structure: Sexes are separate and sexual dimorphism is distinct. In both males and females, the body is elongated and cylindrical. The mouth is present at the extreme anterior end and is surrounded by three chitinous lips close to the mouth. Mid ventrally there is a small aperture called an excretory pore.

Male: It has a curved posterior end which is considered the tail. The posterior end possesses a cloacal aperture and a pair of equal-sized chitinous pineal spicules or pineal setae which serve to transfer the sperms during copulation.

Female: It has a straight posterior end, the tail. The female genital pore or vulva is present mid-ventrally at about one-third the length from the mouth. The anus is present a little in front of the tail end.

Life history: Copulation takes place in the small intestine of a man. After copulation, the female releases approximately two lakh eggs per day. Each egg is surrounded by a protein coat with a rippled surface. Hence the eggs of Ascaris are described as mammilla eggs. The protein coat is followed by a chitinous shelf and a lipid layer internally. These eggs come out along with faecal matter. In the moist soil, development takes place inside the egg so that the 1st stage rhabditiform larva is produced. It undergoes the 1st moulting and becomes the 2nd stage rhabditiform larva which is considered the stage infective to man. They reach the alimentary canal of man through contaminated food and water.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare LAQ Q4
In the small intestine, the shell gets dissolved so that the 2nd stage larva is released. Now it undergoes extra-intestinal migration. First, it reaches the liver through the hepatic portal vein. From there it reaches the heart through the post caval vein. It goes to the lungs through the pulmonary arteries.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare LAQ Q4.1
In the alveoli of the lungs, it undergoes the 2nd moulting to produce the 3rd stage larva. It undergoes the 3rd moulting so that the 4th stage larva is produced in the alveoli only. It leaves the alveoli and reaches the small intestine again through the bronchi, trachea, larynx, glottis, pharynx, oesophagus, and stomach. In the small intestine. It undergoes the 4th and final moulting to become a young one which attains sexual maturity within 8 to 10 weeks.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare LAQ Q4.2

Question 5.
Describe the life cycle of wucheria bancrofti.
Answer:
Wucheria bancrofti is commonly called the filarial worm as it causes filariasis in human beings. It is a digenetic parasite that lives in the lymph vessels of man. Sir Patrick Manson identified the female culex mosquito as its secondary host.

Life cycle: It completes its life cycle in two hosts namely man and female culex mosquito.

In man: Both male and female worms are found coiled together in the lymphatic vessels of man. After copulation, the female releases the sheathed microfilaria larvae into the lymph of the man. Each sheathed microfilaria larva measures 0.2 to 0.3 mm in length. It is surrounded by a loose cuticular sheath which is supposed to be the modified shell. They migrate to the blood circulation and reside in the deeper blood vessels during the daytime. They move to the peripheral blood circulation during the nighttime between 10.00 pm and 4.00 am. This tendency is referred to as nocturnal periodicity. When a female culex mosquito sucks the blood of an infected person. They enter the gut of mosquitoes. They die if they are not transferred to mosquitoes within 70 days.

In mosquito: In the midgut of a mosquito, the sheath of the larva is dissolved within 2 to 6 hours of the infection. The ex-sheathed microfilaria larva penetrates the gut wall and reaches the heamocoel of the mosquito. From there, it reaches the thoracic muscles and transforms into a sausage-shaped larva within two days. It is called the first stage larva or first stage microfilaria. This undergoes two moultings within 10 to 20 days and transforms into infective 3rd stage microfilaria. It reaches the labium of the mosquito.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 6 Biology in Human Welfare LAQ Q5
In man after the infection: When an infected mosquito bites a man, the 3rd stage microfilaria larvae enter the blood circulation of the man and finally reach the lymphatic vessels. Here they undergo the 3rd and the 4th moultings to produce young filarial worms. They attain sexual maturity within 5 to 18 months.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 5 Locomotion and Reproduction in Protozoa

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Lesson 5 Locomotion and Reproduction in Protozoa Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Lesson 5 Locomotion and Reproduction in Protozoa

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Draw a labelled diagram of the T.S of the flagellum.
Answer:
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 5 Locomotion and Reproduction in Protozoa VSAQ Q1

Question 2.
List any two differences between a flagellum and a cilium.
Answer:

FlagellumCilium
1. Flagellum helps in locomotion only.1. Cilium helps in locomotion and feeding and acts as sensory structures.
2. Flagellum produces undular movement.2. Cilium produces pendular movement.
3. Flagellum is about 150µ in length.3. Cilium is small in size 5-10µ in length.

Question 3.
What are dynein arms? What is their significance?
Answer:
‘A’ tube of each peripheral doublet bears paired arms along its length called dynein arms made up of protein dynein.
The dynein arms of the ‘A’ tubule face the tubule ‘B’ of the adjacent doublet.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 5 Locomotion and Reproduction in Protozoa

Question 4.
What is a kinety?
Answer:
In the ciliate protozoans, a longitudinal row of kinetosomes together with kinetodesmata constitute a unit called kinety.

Question 5.
Distinguish between synchronous and metachronous movements.
Answer:
Synchronous movement: Cilia in a transverse row beat simultaneously in one direction. It is called synchronous movement.
Metachronous movement: The sequential movement of cilia, in a longitudinal row, one after the other in one direction is called metachronous movement.

Question 6.
Why do we refer to the offspring, formed by the asexual method of reproduction, as a clone?
Answer:
As a result of the asexual method, the offsprings are, not only identical to one another but also exact copies of their parent. The term ‘clone’ is used to describe such morphologically and genetically similar individuals.

Question 7.
Distinguish between proter and opisthe.
Answer:
During transverse binary fission in Paramecium two daughters, individuals are formed. The anterior one is called proter and the posterior is called opisthe.

Question 8.
How is sexual reproduction advantageous in evolution?
Answer:
Sexual reproduction results the advantageous in evolution in genetic recombination occurs in sexual reproduction.

Question 9.
Distinguish between lobopodium and filopodium. Give an example to each of them.
Answer:
Lobopodium: The blunt and finger-like tubular pseudopodia containing both ectoplasm and endoplasm is called lobopodium.
Ex: Amoeba proteus
Filopodium: The slender filamentous pseudopodia with pointed tips, composed of only ectoplasm are called Filopodium.
Ex: Euglypha

Question 10.
Define conjugation with reference to ciliates. Give two examples.
Answer:
Conjugation is a temporary union between two senile ciliates that belong to two different ‘mating types’ for the exchange of nuclear material and its reorganization. – Wichterman.
Ex: Paramecium and Vorticella.

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Name the system that controls the fastest swimming movement of protozoans and write its components.
Answer:
Ciliary locomotion is the fastest swimming movement of protozoans, Hence, ciliates are the fastest protozoans.
Cilia are small hair-like structures found in ciliate protozoans like Paramecium.

Infraciliary system: It is located just below the pellicle in the ectoplasm of a ciliate. It includes kinetosomes, kinetodesmal fibrils, and kinetodesmata. The kinetosomes are present at the bases of cilia in transverse and longitudinal rows. The kinetodesmal fibrils are connected to the kinetosomes and run along the right side of each row of kinetosomes as a ‘cord of fibres’ called kinetodesmata. A longitudinal row of kinetosomes together with kinetodesmata constitute a unit called ‘kinety’.

All the kineties together form an infraciliary system, which is connected to a ‘motorium’, located near the cytopharynx. The infraciliary system and motorium form the ‘neuromotor system’ that controls and coordinates the movement of cilia.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 5 Locomotion and Reproduction in Protozoa

Question 2.
Write the mechanism of bending the flagellum and explain effectively recovery strokes.
Answer:
The bending movement of a flagellum is brought about by the sliding of microtubules past each other due to the functioning of ‘dynein arms’ utilizing ATP. A flagellum pushes the fluid medium at right angles to the surface of its attachment, by its bending movement.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 5 Locomotion and Reproduction in Protozoa SAQ Q2
Bending movement of flagella and cilia: Dynein arms show a complex cycle of movements using energy provided by ATP (dynein arms are the sites of ATPase activity in the cilia and flagella). The dynein arms of each doublet attach to an adjacent doublet and pull the neighbouring doublet. So the doublets slide past each other in opposite directions. The arms release and reattach a little further on the adjacent doublet and again ‘puli’. As the doublets of a flagellum or cilium are physically held in place by the radial spokes, the doublets cannot slide past much. Instead, they curve and cause the bending of flagellum or cilium. Such bending movements of flagella and cilia play an important role in flagellar and ciliary locomotion.

The flagellar movement of many organisms is a sidewise-lash which consists of two strokes namely the effective or propulsive stroke and the recovery stroke.

  • Effective stroke: Flagellum becomes rigid and starts bending to one side beating against the water. This beating against water is at right angles to the body axis and the organism moves forwards.
  • Recovery stroke: Flagellum becomes comparatively soft so as to offer the least resistance to water and moves back to its original position. It is called ‘recovery stroke’.

Question 3.
What are lateral appendages? Based on their presence and absence, write the various types of flagella giving atleast one example for each type.
Answer:
Lateral appendages: Some flagella bear one or two or many rows of short, lateral hair-like fibrils called lateral appendages. They are of two types namely ‘mastigonemes’ and ‘flimmers’.
Types of Flagella: Based on the presence or absence and/or the number of rows of lateral appendages, five types of flagella are recognized.
(a) Stichonematic: This flagellum bears one row of lateral appendages on the axoneme.
E.g. Euglena and Astasia.
(b) Pantonematic: This flagellum has two or more rows of lateral appendages on the axoneme.
E.g. Peranema and Monas.
(c) Acronematic: This type of flagellum does not bear lateral appendages and the terminal part of the axoneme is naked without the outer sheath at its tip.
E.g. Chlamydomonas and Polytoma
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 5 Locomotion and Reproduction in Protozoa SAQ Q3
(d) Pantacronematic: This type of flagellum is provided with two or more rows of lateral appendages and the axoneme ends in a terminal naked filament.
E.g. Urceolus.
(e) Anematic or simple: In this type of flagellum, lateral appendages and terminal filament are absent. Hence, it is called anematic (a-no; nematic-threads)
E.g. Chilomonas and Gryptomonas.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 5 Locomotion and Reproduction in Protozoa

Question 4.
Describe the process of transverse binary fission in paramecium.
Answer:
Transverse binary fission is performed by Paramecium. Binary fission is the most common method of sexual reproduction in protozoans. During favourable conditions, Paramecium stops feeding after attaining its maximum growth.

At first, the micronucleus divides by mitosis and the macronucleus divides into two daughter nuclei by amitosis. The oral groove disappears. After karyokinesis, a transverse constriction appears in the middle of the body, which deepens and divides the parent cell into two daughter individuals, the anterior proper and the posterior opisthe. The proper receives the anterior contractile vacuole, cytopharynx, and cytosome from its parent individual. It develops a posterior contractile vacuole and a new oral groove.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 5 Locomotion and Reproduction in Protozoa SAQ Q4
The opisthe receives the posterior contractile vacuole of its parent. It develops a new anterior contractile vacuole, cytopharynx, cytostome and a new oral groove. Binary fission is completed in almost two hours, in favourable conditions and Paramecium can produce four generations of daughter individuals by binary fission in a day. The transverse binary fission is also called homothetogenic fission because the plane of fission is at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the body. As it occurs at right angles to the kineties, it is also called perkinetal fission.

Question 5.
Describe the process of longitudinal binary fission in Euglena.
Answer:
Binary fission is the most common method of asexual reproduction in protozoans. Longitudinal binary fission is performed by Euglena. In this type of binary fission, the body divides into two halves longitudinally, hence called longitudinal binary fission.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 5 Locomotion and Reproduction in Protozoa SAQ Q5
During the process of binary fission, the nucleus, basal granules, chromatophores, and cytoplasm undergo division. The nucleus divides by mitosis into two daughter nuclei. Then the kinetosomes and the chromatophores also divide. At first, a longitudinal groove develops in the middle of the anterior end. This groove extends gradually towards the posterior end until the two daughter individuals are separated. One daughter Euglena retains the parental flagella. The other daughter individual develops new flagella from the newly formed basal granules. The stigma, paraflagellar body, and contractile vacuole of the parent disappear. They develop afresh in both the daughter Euglenae. The longitudinal binary fission is known as symmetrogenic division because the two daughters Euglenae resemble each other like mirror images.

Question 6.
Write a short note on multiple fission.
Answer:
Multiple fission: It is the division Of the parent body into many smaller individuals (Multi-many; Fission- splitting). Normally multiple fission occurs during unfavourable conditions. During multiple fission, the nucleus first undergoes repeated mitotic divisions without cytokinesis. This causes the formation of many daughter nuclei. Then the cytoplasm also divides into as many bits as there are nuclei. Each cytoplasmic bit encircles one daughter nucleus. This results in the formation of many smaller individuals from a single-parent organism. There are different types of multiple fissions in protozoans such as Schizogony, malegametogony, sporogony in plasmodium, sporulation in Amoeba, etc.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 5 Locomotion and Reproduction in Protozoa

Question 7.
Give an account of pseudopodia.
Answer:
Locomotion in protozoans is performed by cellular extensions such as pseudopodia found in rhizopods organisms. The pseudopodia are temporary extensions of cytoplasm that develop in the direction of the movement. These temporary structures are useful to move on the substratum as our legs do, hence the name ‘pseudopodia’. There are four kinds of pseudopodia in protozoans.

  1. Lobopodia: blunt + finger like Pseudopodia. Ex: Amoeba, Entamoeba.
  2. Filopodia: fiber like pseudopodia contain ectoplasm. Ex: Euglypha.
  3. Reticulopodia: net like pseudopodia. Ex: Elphidium.
  4. Axopodia or heliopodia: Sun ray-like pseudopodia. Ex: Actinophiys.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 5 Locomotion and Reproduction in Protozoa SAQ Q7

Question 8.
Give an account of the ultrastructure of an axoneme.
Answer:
Ultrastructure of flagellum: The axial filament or axoneme shows 9+2 organisation under the electron microscope. Two central singlets are enclosed by a fibrous inner sheath. Nine peripheral doublets form a cylinder between the inner sheath and the outer sheath. The “A” microtubule of each doublet is connected to the inner sheath by radial spokes. It also has pairs of arms all along the length and is directed towards the neighbouring doublet.

These arms are made of a protein called dynein. These arms create the sliding force. The peripheral doublets are surrounded by an outer membranous sheath called a protoplasmic sheath, which is the extension of the plasma membrane. Some flagella bear lateral appendages called flimmers or mastigonemes along the length of the axoneme above the level of the pellicle. Each flagellum arises from a basal granule that lies below the cell surface in the ectoplasm.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 5 Locomotion and Reproduction in Protozoa SAQ Q8

Question 9.
Draw a neat labelled diagram of Euglena.
Answer:
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 5 Locomotion and Reproduction in Protozoa SAQ Q9

Question 10.
Draw a neat diagram of paramecium and label its important structures/components.
Answer:
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 5 Locomotion and Reproduction in Protozoa SAQ Q10

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 5 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material 5th Lesson Morphology of Flowering Plants Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material 5th Lesson Morphology of Flowering Plants

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Differentiate fibrous roots from adventitious roots. [T.S. May, 18]
Answer:

Fibrous rootsAdventitious roots
Several number of roots originate from the base of the stem called fibrous roots.Roots that arise from parts of the plant other than the radicle are called Adventitious roots.

Question 2.
Define modification. Mention how root is modified in Banyan tree and mangrove plants.
Answer:
Modification is defined as “A permanent morphological change in an organ in order to perform a special function”. In banyan tree, roots develop from the huge branches and grow into the soil become pillar like called prop roots or piller roots. In Mangroves – Many roots come out of the ground, grow vertically upwards called Pneumatophores, or Respiratory roots help in gaseous exchange.

Question 3.
What types of specialized roots are found in Epiphytic plants? What is their function?
Answer:
In Epiphytic plants, velamen roots are present. They help in absorption of moisutrefrom atmosphere.

Question 4.
How does the sucker of chrysanthemum differ from the stolon of Jasmine?
Answer:

SuckerStolon
The lateral branches originate from the basal and underground portion of the stem grow horizontally beneath the soil and then come out obliquely upward giving rise to leafy shoots.
Ex : Chrysanthemum, Mentha.
A slender lateral branch arises from the base of the main axis, grow aerially, arches downwards to touch the ground and produce adventitious roots.
Ex : Jasmine, Nerium.

Question 5.
What is meant by pulvinus leaf base? In members of which angiospermic family do you find them? [A.P. May, 18, 17. Mar, 14]
Answer:
The swollen leaf base is called pulvinous leaf base. It is seen is “Leguminasae” family.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 5 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Question 6.
Define venation. How do Dicots differ from Monocots with respect to venation. [A.P. Mar, 15]
Answer:
“The arrangement of veins and the veinlets in the lamina of the leaf” is called venation.

In Dicots, Midrib, lateral veins and veinlets form a network so called Reticulate venation.

In Monocots, the veins run parallel to each other within a lamina so called parallel venation.

Question 7.
How is Pinnately compound leaf is different from a palmately compound leaf? Explain with one example each.
Answer:
Lamina is divided into leaflets which are arranged on either side of the rachis is called pinnately compound leaf.
Ex : Neem

Lamina is divided into leaflets, which are arranged at the tip of the petiole, called Palmately compound leaf.
Ex : Bean, Citrus.

Question 8.
Which organ is modified to trap insects in Insectivorous plants? Give two examples. [Mar, 13]
Answer:
In Insectivorous plants, leaves (Lamina) are modified to trap insects.
Ex : Nepenthes, Drosera.

Question 9.
Differentiate between Racemose and Cymose inflorescences. [T.S. Mar, 15]
Answer:

Racemose InflorescenceCymose Inflorescence
1. Peduncle grows Indefinitely.1. Peduncle grows definitely.
2. Flowers are arranged in Acropetal manner.2. Flowers are arranged in Basipetal manner.

Question 10.
What is the morphology of cup like structure in Cyathium? In which family it is found?
Answer:
In Cyathium, cup like structure is formed from Involucre of Bracts. It is seen in “Euphorbiaceae” family.

Question 11.
What type of Inflorescence is found in fig trees ? Why does the insect Balstophaga visits the Inflorescence of fig tree?
Answer:
In ‘Fig’ trees, ‘Hypanthodium’ Inflorescence is seen. An Insect called ‘Blastophaga’ visits this inflorescence, because it lay its eggs in the gall flowers.

Question 12.
Differentiate actinomorphic from zygomorphic flower.
Answer:

Actinomorphic FlowerZygomorphic Flower
“A Flower that can be cut into two equal halves in any vertical plane”.
Ex : Datura, Hibiscus.
“A flower that can be cut into two equal halves in one vertical plane”.
Ex : Bean, Crotalaria.

Question 13.
How do the petals in pea plant are arranged? What is such type of arrangement called?
Answer:
In Pea and Bean Flowers, there are five petals. The largest petal (standard) overlaps the two lateral petals (wings) which in turn overlap the two smallest anterior petals (Keel). This type of aestivation is called Descendingly Imbricate aestivation. This type of corolla is called vexillary or papilionaceous corolla.

Question 14.
What is meant by eipetalous condition? Give an example.
Answer:
When the stamens are attached to the petals that condition is called Epipetalous condition.
Ex : Brinjal, Datura.

Question 15.
Differentiate between apocarpous and syncarpores ovary.
Answer:

Apocarpous ovarySyncarpores ovary
“When more than one carpel is present in a ovary, they may be free”
Ex : Rose
When morethan one carpel is present in a ovary, they are fused.
Ex : Tomato

Question 16.
Define placentation. What type of placentation is found in Dianthus. [T.S. Mar, 15]
Answer:
“The arrangement of ovules with in the ovary is known as placentation”. In Dianthus – Free Central placentation is seen.

Question 17.
What is meant by parthenocarpic fruit? How is it useful?
Answer:
The fruit which is formed without fertilization of the ovary is called parthenocarpic fruit. They are useful commercial production of seedless fruits and also useful in Juice Indus tries.

Question 18.
What is the type of fruit found in mango ? How does it differ from that of coconut?
Answer:
In Mango, the type of fruit is Drupe. In Mango Epicarp is thin, Mesocarp is fleshy and edible and endocarp is stony. Where as in coconut, the mesocarp is fibrous.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 5 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Question 19.
Why certain fruits are called false fruits? Name two examples of plants having false fruits. [T.S. May, 18. Mar, 13]
Answer:
Fruits which are formed form other parts of the flower along with ovary are called false fruits.
Ex : Apple – Thalamus develops into false fruit.
Cashewnut – Pedicel develops into False fruit,

Question 20.
Name any two plants having single seeded dry fruits.
Answer:
(1) Rice (Caryopsis) (2) Cashew nut (nut) (3) Tridax (Cypsela)

Question 21.
Define Schizocarpic dry fruits. Give an example.
Answer:
The fruits which split into one-seeded bits, called mericarps and are called Schizocarpic fruits.
Ex : Acacia, Castor. ,

Question 22.
Define mericarp. In which plant you find it?
Answer:
The one seeded bits of Schizocarpic fruits are called mericarps.
Ex : Acacia.

Question 23.
What are aggregate fruits? Give two examples. [A.P. May, 18]
Answer:
In custard apple. Many carpels are present. Each carpel of apocarpous gynoecium develops into a fruitlet. Such bunch of fruitlets are called aggregate fruits.
Ex : Annona, Naravalia.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 5 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Question 24.
Name a plant that has single fruit developing from the entire inflorescence. What is such a fruit called? [Mar, 14]
Answer:
Pine apple. This fruit is called composite fruit.

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Explain different regions of root with neat labelled diagram.
Answer:
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 5 Morphology of Flowering Plants 1
The tip of the root is covered by Thimble like structure called root cap which protect the root apex. A few m.m above the root cap, meristematic zone is present which consists of small, thin walled cells with dense protoplasm. These cells divide repeatedly. The cells proximal to this zone undergo rapid elongation and enlargement and are responsible for growth of the root in length.

This region is called elongation region. The cells of the elongation zone gradually differentiate and mature so called maturation zone. From this zone, some of the epidermal cells form very thin and delicate thread like structures, called root hairs which help in absorption of water and Minerals from the soil.

Question 2.
Justify the statement, “Underground parts of plants are not always roots”.
Answer:
In some plants, stems are underground and help in storage of food materials, organs of perennation to tide over unfavourable conditions, vegetative propagation and also protect themselves form grazing animals. More over, underground stems bear nodes, internodes, buds and scale leaves. Because of this, they are treated as stems but not roots, so underground parts of plants are not root.
Ex : Stem tuber of Potato, Rhizome of Zinger, Turmeric, corm of Amorphophallus, Colocasia and Bulb of onion.

Question 3.
Explain with examples different types of phyllotaxy.
Answer:
Arrangement of leaves on the stem or on the branchs is called Phyllotaxy. It is of three types.
A) Alternate Phyllotaxy : A single leaf arises at each node arranged in alternate manner.
Ex : Hibiscus rosa-sinensis, mustard.

B) Opposite Phyllotaxy : A pair of leaves arise at each node and lie opposite to each other.
Ex : Calotropis, Guava.

C) Whorled Phyllotaxy : More than two leaves arise at a node and form a whorl.
Ex : Nerium, Alstonia.
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 5 Morphology of Flowering Plants 2

Question 4.
How do leaf modifications help plants?
Answer:
Leaf modifications will help to plants in Many ways. They are
a) In weak stemmed plants like peas, leaves are converted into long, coiled tendrils and help in climbing.
b) In Desert plants like Cacti, leaves are modified into spines, which gave protection from grazing animals.
c) In Onion and Garlic : The fleshy leaves help in storage of food materials.
d) In Australian acacia, the leaves are pinnately compound in which leaflets are small and short lived. The petioles of these plants expand, become green and synthesize food called phyllodes.
e) In Insectivores plants, like Nepenthes, Dionea, leaves are modified into traps which kill insects for their nitrogen requirement.
f) In Bryophyllum, epiphyllous buds which arise from the notches of the leaves develop into new plants, thus help in vegetative Propagation.
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 5 Morphology of Flowering Plants 3

Question 5.
Describe any two special types of Inflorescences.
Answer:
1) Cyathium :
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 5 Morphology of Flowering Plants 4
It is a single flower like special inflorescence found in Euphorbiaceae members. The inflorescence is covered by a deep cup like involucre of bracts. At the centre of the cup, there is a single female flower represented by a long stalked tricarpellary, Syncarpous pistil. Encircling this females flower, many male flowers are arranged in scorpioid cymes. Each male flower is represented by a single and stalked stamen. Male and female flowers are achlymadeous. Flowers are arranged in centrifugal manner.
Ex : Euphorbia and Poinsettia

2) Hypanthodium :
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 5 Morphology of Flowering Plants 5
It is a fruit like inflorescence. The inflorescence axis is condensed and forms a fleshy, cup like structure with an apical opening. Small, sessile, unisexual flowers develop on the inner wall of the cup. Male flowers are near the apical opening and female flowers are at the base. In between these two types of flowers, some sterile female flowers called ‘gall flowers’ are present. The opening of flowers is not in a definite order.
Ex : Ficus species.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 5 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Question 6.
Describe the arrangement of floral membes in relation to their insertion on thalamus.
Answer:
Based on the position of Calyx, corolla and androecium on thalamus in respect to the ovary, the flowers are of three types.
They are :
A) Hypogynous,
B) Perigynous,
C) Epigynous

A) Hypogynous flower :
The gynoecium occupies the highest position, while the other parts are situated below it. The ovary is said to be superior.
Ex : Mustard, Brinjal.

B) Perigynous flower :
Gynoecium is present in the centre of the thalamus and other parts of the flower are located on the rim of the thalamus. The ovary is said to be half superior.
Ex : Rose, Pea.

C) Epigynous flower :
The ovary is completely embeded in the cup like thalamus. Other floral parts of the flower arise just above the ovary. In this, the ovary is said to be Inferior.
Ex : Guava, Cucumber.
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 5 Morphology of Flowering Plants 6

Question 7.
“The flower of many angiospermic plants which show sepals and petals differe with respect to the arrangement of sepals and petals in respective whorls” – Explain.
Answer:
The mode of arrangement of sepals or petals in floral bud is knwon as Aestivation. It is of 4 types.
A) Valvate :
“When sepals or petals in a whorl just touch one another at the margins without overlapping”.
Ex : Calotropis.
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 5 Morphology of Flowering Plants 7

B) Twisted :
“If the margin of the appendage overlaps that of the next one and so on”.
Ex : Cotton, Hibiscus. (Petals).

C) Imbricate :
If the margins of sepals or petals overlap one another but not in any particular direction.
Ex : Cassia, gulmohar.

D) Vexillary :
5 petals are present, of which the largest Petal (standard) overlaps the two lateral petals (Wings) which in turn overlap the two smallest anterior petals (keel). This is known as vexillary or papilionaceous aestivation.
Ex : Pea, Bean.

Question 8.
Describe any four types of placentations found in flowering plants.
Answer:
The arrangement of ovules with in the ovary is known as placentation. It is of 5 types.
A) Marginal :
“The placenta forms a ridge along the ventral suture of the ovary and the ovules are borne on this ridge forming two rows”.
Ex : Pea.

B) Axial :
The ovules are attached to central placenta in a multilocular ovary.
Ex : Tomato, lemon.

C) Parietal :
The ovules develop on the inner wall of the oary. Ovary is one chambered but it becomes two chambered due to the development of flase septum.
Ex : Mustard.

D) Free central :
The ovules are borne on central axis without septa.
Ex : Dianthus.

E) Basal :
The placenta develops at the base of the ovary and a single ovule is attached to it.
Ex : Sunflower.
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 5 Morphology of Flowering Plants 8

Question 9.
Describe in brief fleshy fruits you studied.
Answer:
Fruits which become fleshy at maturity one are called fleshy fruits. They are 5 types.
1) Berry :
It develops from Bi or multicarpellary syncarpous Gynoecium. The mesocarp and endocarp are fused to form the pulp and the seeds are hard.
Ex : Tomato, Guava.

2) Pepo :
It develops from Tricarpellary syncarpous inferior ovary. The epicarp is rigid, the mesocarp is fleshy and the endocarp is smooth.
Ex : Cucumber.

3) Pome :
It develops from Bi of multicarpellary inferior ovary and is surrounded by fleshy thalamus. The endocarp is cartilegumous.
Ex : Apple.

4) Hesperidium :
It develops from Multicarpellary syncarpous, superior ovary. The epicarp is leathery with volatile giands, Mesocarp is papery and endocarp is several chambered with juicy hairs.
Ex : Citrus.

5) Drupe :
It develops from Monocarpellary superior ovary. In Mango, the epicarp is thin, a middle fleshy edible mesocarp and inner stony hard endocarp. In coconut, the mesocarp is fibrous.

Question 10.
Describe with examples, the various dry fruits you studied.
Answer:
The fruits which become dry at maturity are called Dry fruits. They are of 3 types.
1) Dry dehiscent fruits :
“The fruits which breaks and liberate the seeds”.
Ex : (a) In legumes the fruit dehisces dorsiventrally into two halves and liberate the seeds,
(b) In Cotton, Datura – The capsule dehisce in different ways to liberate the seeds.

2) Dry Indehiscent fruits :
The fruits do not break and liberate the seeds only after the disintegration of pericarp.
Ex : (a) In Rice, The fruit is caryopsis. In this the pericarp and seed coat fuse together.
(b) In Cashew, the fruit is nut, whiph develops from multicarpellary, Syncarpous ovary. The pericarp is stony.
(c) In Tridax, The fruit is cypsela, Identified by the presence of persistent pappus like calyx.

3) Schizocarpic fruits :
“The fruit at maturity split into one – seeded bits called mericarps”.
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 5 Morphology of Flowering Plants 9

Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Define root. Mention the types of root systems. Explain how root is modified to perform different functions. [A.P & T.S. Mar, 17, 15, 13]
Answer:
The Radicle of the embryo elongates leads to the formation of primary root which grows into the soil is called root. In Angiosperms, two types of root systems are present namely, (a) Tap root system (b) Fibrous root system.
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 5 Morphology of Flowering Plants 10

a) Tap root system :
The primary root grows into the soil called tap root, which produce lateral roots and root lets constitutes tap root system. It is seen in Dicotyledonous plants.

b) Fibrous root system :
The primary root is short lived and is replaced by a large number of roots which orginate from the base of the stem constitutes fibrous root system. It is seen in Monocotyledonous plants.

Root Modifications :
In some plants, roots change their shape and structure to perform functions other than absorption and conduction of water and Minerals called root modifications. They are of different types.

1) Storage roots :
In Carrot, turnip (Tap roots), Sweat potato (Adventitious roots), Asparagus (Fibrous roots) become swollen due to storage of food called storage roots.

2) Prop roots :
In Banyan tree, Roots arise from the branches grow into the soil, become pillar like and give additional support called prop roots or pillar roots.

3) Stilt oots :
In Maize, sugarcane, roots arise from the lower nodes of the stem, give additional support called stilt roots.

4) Respiratorty roots :
In Mangroves like Rhizophora and Avicennia, Many roots come out of the ground and grow vertically upwards, help in respiration called Pneumatophores.

5) Epiphytic roots :
In Epiphytes like Vanda, special adventitious roots arise, help in absorption of moisture from almosphere called Velamen roots.

6) Parasitic roots :
In partial parasites like viscum and strga, some Haustorial roots enter into xylem of the host plant to get water and Minerals. In complete parasitic like cuscuta and Rafflesia, the haustorial roots enter into xylem and phloem of the host plant and obtain water and Minerals and food materials called Parasitic roots.

7) Nodular roots :
In the members of Fabaceae, the roots are inhabited by Rhizobium bacteria which helps in N2 fixation called Nodular roots.

8) Photosynthetic roots :
In some plants like Taeniophyllum, the roots are chlorophyllous and perform photosynthesis so called photosynthetic roots.
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 5 Morphology of Flowering Plants 11
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 5 Morphology of Flowering Plants 12

Question 2.
Explain how stem is modified variously to perform different functions. [Mar, 14] [A.P & T.S. Mar, 18]
Answer:
Stems are modified in several ways to perform different functions.

In some plants stem grows into soil, not only stores food materials but also acts as organs of pennations. Such stems are called underground stem modifications. Further, they also help in vegetative propagation.
Ex : The stem tuber of potato, Rhizome of zingiber, corm of colocasia and Bulb of onion.
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 5 Morphology of Flowering Plants 13
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 5 Morphology of Flowering Plants 14

In some plants, Aerial stems show many modifications.
1) Tendrils :
Slender, spirally coiled structures which may develop either from Auxiliary Bud [Cucumber, watermelon] or from Terminal Bud [Grapes] called stem Tendrils, help in climbing.

2) Thorns :
In some plants, buds are modified into woody, straight, pointed thorns, which protect plants from grazing animals.
Ex : Citrus, Bougainvillaea.

3) Phylloclade :
In some plants of arid regions, stems are modified into fleshy flattened (opuntia) or fleshy cylindrical (Euphorbia) or needle like structures (casuarina), called phylloclades. They carry out photosynthesis as their leaves are reduced to scales or spines to reduce the transpiration.

4) Bulbils :
In some plants, the vegetative buds (Diascorea) or floral buds (Agave) store food materials. At maturity they detach from the parent plants, develop adventitious roots and help in vegetative propagation. These are called Bulbils.
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 5 Morphology of Flowering Plants 15

In some plants, some part of the stem is aerial and some part is underground. Such stems are called sub aerial stem modifications.
1. Runners :
Sub aerial stems of “oxalis” spread to new niches and form new plants when older parts die. Such plants are called runners.

2. Stolons :
In plants like Nerium, Jasmine, a slender lateral branch called ‘stolon’ arises from the base of the main axis, grow vertically, arches downwards and touch the ground, produce adventitious roots.

3. Off-sets :
In some aquatic plants like pistia and Eichhornia, a lateral branch of one internode length called offset which bears a rosette of leaves at each node and a tuft of adventitious roots arising from the base of the discoid stem.

4. Suckers :
In plants like banana, chrysanthemum, the lateral branches originate from the basal portion of the main stem, grows horizontally, beneath the soil and then come out obliquely upwards giving rise to leafy shoots. These branches are called suckers. All these sub-aerial stem modifications help in vegetative propagation.
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 5 Morphology of Flowering Plants 16

Question 3.
Explain different types of Racemos inflorescences.
Answer:
Racemose Inflorescences are of several types. They are :
1) Simple Raceme :
The pedunde is simple, unbranched producing many pedicellate, bracteate flowers in Acropetal Manner.

2) Corymb :
The peduncle is long, and bears many flowers in Acropetal manner, but all the flowers are brought to the same level due to varied lengths of pedicels even through they are borne at different nodes.
Ex : Cassia, Cauliflower.

3) Umbel :
The flower appear to have arisen from the same point of the peduncle and is called umbel type. The Inflorescence is covered by a whorl of bracts called “Involucre”. Ex : Apiaceae, carrot.

4) Spike :
The peduncle is long and bears many sessile flowers, arranged in Aeropetal Manner.
Ex : Achy rant hus, poaceae.

5) Spadix :
In some plants, penduncle bears sessile unisexual and neutral flowers arranged in acropetal manner, covered and protected by modified Bract called spathe.
Ex : Cocos, colocasia.

6) Head :
In some plants, unisexual and bisexual sessile flowers develop centripetially on a condensed peduncle.
Ex : Tridax, sunflower.
AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 5 Morphology of Flowering Plants 17

Additional Questions & Answers

Question 1.
What is meant by Scutellum? In which type of seeds it is present?
Answer:
Large and shield shaped cotyledon is known as scutllum. It is seen in Monocot seeds.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 5 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Question 2.
Define with examples endospermic and non-endospermic seeds.
Answer:
Endosperm may be completely consumed by the developing.

embryo before seed maturation. Such seeds are called non-endospermic seeds.

The seeds with endosperm after maturation are called endospermic seeds.
Ex : Castor, Coconut.

Intext Questions

Question 1.
In which plant, the underground stem grows horizontally in soil and helps in perennation?
Answer:
Zingiber officinalis (ginger) – Rhizome.
Curcuma tonga (Turmeric) – Rhizome.

Question 2.
Needle like phylloclades are found in which plant?
Answer:
Casuarina.

Question 3.
Why do plants like Nepenthes trap Insects?
Answer:
Nepenthes generally grow in Nitrogen deficient soils. In this, leaves are modified into pitcher to trap insects for their nitrogen requirement.

Question 4.
What is the characteristic Inflorescence found in members of Asteraceae?
Answer:
Head or Capitulum.

Question 5.
Can you name a plant that has least number of flowers in its inflorescence?
Answer:
Hibiscus, Datura.

Question 6.
Which family shows naked flowers?
Answer:
Euphorbiaceae.

Question 7.
In which flowers of the fig trees does the Insect Blastophaga lay its eggs ?
Answer:
Gall flowers.

Question 8.
What type of symmetry is shown by the flowers of Canna?
Answer:
Asymmetric.

Question 9.
On which side of the flower do the flowers of pea have the keel petals?
Answer:
Anterior side.

Question 10.
What is the ratio of overlapping margins of petals to overlapped ones in imbricate aestivation?
Answer:
5 : 4

Question 11.
How many ovules are found attached in Basal placentation?
Answer:
One

Question 12.
Which part of the flower in Cashew plant forms the false fruit?
Answer:
Pedicel

Question 13.
Which plant has hard, stony endocarp and fleshy edible mesocarp?
Answer:
Mango

Question 14.
What is the morphology of spathe in spadix Inflorescence?
Answer:
Bract (enlarged)

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 5 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Question 15.
What is the type of fruit known as if it develops from apocarpus ovary of a single flower?
Answer:
Aggregate fruits. (Anona squamosa)

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 3 Science of Plants – Botany

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material 3rd Lesson Science of Plants – Botany Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material 3rd Lesson Science of Plants – Botany

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Explain how the term Botany has emerged.
Answer:
In ancient Greek language, the term Bouskein means Cattle feed. The term ‘Bouskein’ gave rise to “Botane” from which the term “Botany’’ is derived.

Question 2.
Name the books written Parasara and mention the important aspects discussed in those books. [A.P. Mar. 17]
Answer:
Parasara’s ‘Krishi Parasaram’ mentioned about agriculture and weeds. ‘Vrikshayurveda’ gives information about 14 types of forests; the external and internal characters of plants and about medicinal plants.

Question 3.
Who is popularly known as father of Botany ? What was the book written by him? [T.S. Mar, 18]
Answer:
“Theophrastus” is regarded as the Father of Botany. The book written by him was ‘De Historia plantarum”,

Question 4.
Who are Herbalists? What are the books written by them?
Answer:
The scientists who described the live Medicinal plants technically are called the Herbalists. The books written by them are called Herbals.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 3 Science of Plants – Botany

Question 5.
What was the contribution of Carolus Von Linnaeus for the development of plant taxonomy?
Answer:
“Carolus Von Linnaeus” popularised Binomial Nomenclature. He also proposed the sexual system of classification.

Question 6.
Why is Mendel considered as the father of Genetics?
Answer:
Mendel conducted Hybridization experiments on pea plants and also introduced the laws of inheritance in 1866. Hence, he is considered as the Father of Genetics.

Question 7.
Who discovered the cell and what was the book written by him? [A.P. May 17, Mar 14]
Answer:
Robert Hooke first discovered the cell. “Micrographia” was the book written by him.

Question 8.
What is Palaeobotany? What is its use? [T.S. Mar, 17, 15, 13]
Answer:
Palaeobotany deals with the study of fossil plants. It helps in understanding the course of evolution in plants.

Question 9.
Name the branches of Botany which deal with the chlorophylfous autotrophic thallophytes and non-chlorophyllous heterotrophic thallophytes.
Answer:
Study of chlorophyllous autotrophic thallophytes is called Phycology. Study of non- chlorophyllous heterotrophic thallophytes is called Mycology.

Question 10.
What are the group of plants that live as symbionts in lichens? Name the study of Lichens. [T.S. May, 18]
Answer:
Algae and Fungi are the plant groups that live as symbionts in lichens. The study of lichens is called lichenology.

Question 11.
Which group of plants are called Vascular cryptogams ? Name the branch of Botany which deals with them?
Answer:
“Pteridophytes” are called vascular cryptogams. The branch of Botany that deals with them is called Pteridology.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 3 Science of Plants – Botany

Question 12.
Which group of plants are called amphibians of plant kingdom? Name the branch of Botany which deals with them.
Answer:
Bryophytes are called amphibians of plant Kingdom. The branch that deals with Bryophytes is called Bryology.

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Explain in brief the scope of Botany in relation to agriculture, horticulture and medicine.
Answer:

  1. The problems like decreasing resources and increasing population could be solved by enhancing crop yield through Green Revolution and.also by developing disease* pest resistance crops by utilizing the principles of Biotechnology.
  2. Progress in Agriculture, Forestry horticulture is possible through hybridization experiments and Genetic Engineering technology.
  3. New plant breeding techniques are useful to develop hybrid varieties in crop plants like Rice, Wheat, Maize, Sugarcane etc.
  4. Phytopathology is helpful in the prevention and eradication of several plant diseases.
  5. Knowledge on the role of plant hormones in plant growth and development is significant to improve Agriculture and Horticulture through herbicidal control of weed, breaking of seed dormancy etc., Experiments in tissue and organ culture is possible to produce large number of plants in the laboratory within a short duration.
  6. Several industries could be developed based on Botany.
  7. Studies in Medicinal plants like Arnica, Cinchona, Neem, Datura, Rauwolfia, Ocimum are also important to explore them for human health care.
  8. Production of Antibiotics, Bioinsecticides, single cell proteins is also made possible by study of these product yielding plants.

Question 2.
Explain the scope of Botany taking plant physiology as example.
Answer:

  1. The role of Minerals iri plant nutrition is useful in rational usage of chemical fertilizers and control of mineral deficiencies to improve Agricultural productivity.
  2. Knowledge on the role of plant hormones in plant growth and development’s highly significant to improve Agriculture and horticulture through herbicidal control of weeds, breaking of seed dormancy, enhancement of shelf-life period of leafy vegetables like spinach, artificial ripening of fruits like apple, banana and rooting of stem cuttings for Vegetative propogation.

AP Inter 1st Year Botany Study Material Chapter 3 Science of Plants – Botany

Question 3.
What are the different branches of botany that deal with morphology of plants ? Give their salient features.
Answer:
Morphology deals with the study of different organs of a plant. It is a fundamental requisite for classification of plants. It is of two types,
a) External Morphology
b) Internal Morphology.

a) External Morphology :
It is the study and description of external characters of plant organs like root, stem, leaf, flower, seed and fruit etc.

b) Internal Morphology :
It is the study of internal structure of different plant organs. It is of two types. They are i) Histology ii) Anatomy.
i) Histology :
Study of different tissues present in the plant body.

ii) Anatomy :
Study of gross internal details of plant organs like root, stem, leaf, flower, etc.

Long Answer Type Question

Question 1.
Give a comprehensive account of the scope of Botany in different fields giving an example for each.
Answer:
I) Agriculture :

  1. Enhancement of crop yield through Green Revolution solves the problems like decreasing resources and increasing population.
  2. New plant breeding techniques are useful to develop hybrid varieties in crop plants like Rice, Wheat, Maize, Sugarcane etc.
  3. Phytopathology is helpful in prevention and eradication of several plant diseases.

II) Medicine :

  1. Studies in Medicinal plants like Arnica, Cinchona, Neem, Datura, Rauwolfia, Ocimum are important to explore them for human health care.
  2. Production of antibiotics, bioinsecticides, single cell proteins is made possible by study of these plants.

III) Environmental Issues :

  1. Control of Green house effect by tree plantation and soil pollution by bio-remediation, recycling of nutrients by saprophytic organisms, usage of biofertilizers to avoid soil and water pollution caused by chemical fertilizers and prevention of soil erosion by sand binding plants.
  2. Usage of algae (Chlorella) as food for astronauts in space research programmes and extraction of Iodine, agar-agar etc. from several sea weeds also indicate the scope of Botany for the Contemporary World.

IV) Commercial Products :
Knowledge of plants which yield commercially important and useful products like timber fibres, beverages such as coffe and tea, condiments, rubber, gums, resins, dyes, essential and aromatic oils is of great importance for their exploitation.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Lesson 2 Structural Organisation in Animals Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Lesson 2 Structural Organisation in Animals

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
The body of sponges does not possess a tissue level of organisation, though it is made up of thousands of cells. Comment on it.
Answer:
Even though the sponge’s body is made up of thousands of cells, they exhibit a cellular grade of organization, due to the absence of sensory and nerve cells spongs do not possess a tissue level of organisation.

Question 2.
What is the tissue level of organisation among animals? Which metazoans exhibit this organisation?
Answer:
The tissue level of organisation is the lowest level of organisation among the eumetazoans, exhibited by diploblastic animals like cnidarians.

Question 3.
Animals exhibiting which level of organisation lead the relatively more efficient way of life when compared to those of the other levels of organisation? Why?
Answer:
Animals exhibit an organ-system level of organisation of the animals and are exhibited by the triploblastic animals.
Organ level of organisation is a further advancement over the tissue level in the evolution of levels of organisation.

Question 4.
What is monaxial heteropolar symmetry? Name the group of animals in which it is the principal symmetry.
Answer:
Monaxial heteropolar symmetry: When any plane passing through the central axis of the body divides an organism into two identical parts is called Monaxial heteropolar symmetry or radial symmetry. It is the principal symmetry of diploblastic animals such as Cnidarians and ctenophores.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals

Question 5.
Radial symmetry is an advantage to sessile or slow-moving organisms. Justify this statement.
Answer:
Animals showing radial symmetry live in water and they can respond equally to stimuli that arrive from all directions. Thus, radial symmetry is an advantage to sessile or slow-moving animals.

Question 6.
What is cephalization? How is it useful to its possessors?
Answer:
Cephalization: Concentration of nerve (Brain) and sensory cells at the anterior end of the body is called Cephalization. As a result of cephalization, these animals can sense the new environment and are more efficient than the other animals in seeking food, locating mates, and avoiding or escaping from predators.

Question 7.
Mention the animals that exhibited a ‘tube-within-a-tube’ organisation for the first time? Name their body cavity.
Answer:
Cnidarians and some flat warms are the first animals to exhibit a ‘tube-within-a-tube’ organisation. The body cavity is pseudocolor.

Question 8.
Why is the true coelom considered a secondary body cavity?
Answer:
During the embryonic development of the coelomates, the blastocoel is replaced by a true coelom derived from the mesoderm. So, the true coelom is also called ‘the secondary body cavity.

Question 9.
What are retroperitoneal organs?
Answer:
Certain organs such as the kidneys of the vertebrates are covered by the parietal peritoneum only on their ventral side. Such a peritoneum is called the ‘retroperitoneum’ and the organs lined by it are called ‘retroperitoneal organs.

Question 10.
If the mesentoblast cell is removed in the early embryonic development of protostomes what would be the fate of such animals?
Answer:
In the protostomes, the mesentoblast cell of the early embryo divides to form mesodermal blacks between the ectoderm and the endoderm and replaces the blastocoel. The split that appears in each mesodermal black leads to the formation of Schizocoelom. If the mesentoblast cell is removed in the early embryonic development of protostomes it will cause no ceolome in their animals.

Question 11.
What is enterocoelom? Name the enterocoelomate phyla in the animal kingdom.
Answer:
Animals in which the body cavity is formed from the mesodermal pouches of archenteron are called ‘enterocoelomates’.
Echinoderms, hemichordates, and chordates are enterocoelomates.

Question 12.
Stratified epithelial cells have a limited role in secretion. Justify their role in our skin.
Answer:
The main function of stratified epithelial cells is to provide protection against chemicals and mechanical stress. Hence the stratified epithelial cells have a limited role in secretion.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals

Question 13.
Distinguish between exocrine and endocrine glands with examples.
Answer:
Exocrine glands are provided with ducts. Secrete mucus, saliva, earwax, oil, milk, digestive enzymes, and other cell products.
Endocrine glands are ductless and their products are hormones that are not sent out via ducts but are carried to the target organs by blood.
Ex: Pituitary gland.

Question 14.
Distinguish between holocrine and apocrine glands.
Answer:
Apocrine glands in which the apical part of the gland cell in pinched off along with the secretory product.
Ex: Mammary glands
Holocrine glands, in which the entire cell disintegrates to discharge the contents.
Ex: Sebaceous glands

Question 15.
Mention any two substances secreted by mast cells and their functions.
Answer:
Mast cells secrete heparin – an anticoagulant, histamine, bradykinin – vasodilators, and serotonin – vasoconstrictor. Vasodilators cause inflammation in response to injury and infection.

Question 16.
Distinguish between a tendon and a ligament.
Answer:
Tendons are the collagen fibrous tissue of dense regular connective tissue which attaches the skeletal muscles to bones.
Ligaments are also the collagen fibers tissue of dense regular connective tissue which attach bones to other bones.

Question 17.
Distinguish between brown fat and white fat.
Answer:
White fat: It is the predominant type in adults, the adipocyte has a single large lipid droplet. White fat is metabolically not active.
Brown fat: It is found in fetuses and infants. Adipocyte of Brown fat has several small ‘lipid droplets’ and are metabolically active and generates heat to maintain body temperature required by infants.

Question 18.
What is the strongest cartilage? In which regions of the human body, do you find it?
Answer:
The fibrous cartilage is the strongest of all types of cartilage. It occurs in the intervertebral discs and pubic symphysis of the pelvis.

Question 19.
Distinguish between osteoblasts and osteoclasts.
Answer:
Osteoblasts are immature bone cells that secrete the organic components of the matrix and also play an important role in the mineralization of bone and become Osteocytes. Osteoclasts are phagocytic cells involved in the resorption of bone.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals

Question 20.
Define Osteon.
Answer:
In compact bone structure, a Haversian canal and the surrounding lamellae and lacunae are collectively called a Haversian system or Osteon.

Question 21.
What are Volkmann’s canals? What is their role?
Answer:
In compact bone structure, the Haversian canals communicate with one another, with the periosteum and also with the marrow cavity by transverse or oblique canals called Volkmann’s canals.

Question 22.
What is a Sesamoid bone? Give an example.
Answer:
Sesamoid bones are formed by ossification in tendons.
Eg: Patella (Knee cap) and Pisiform bone of the wrist of a mammal.

Question 23.
What is lymph? How does it differ from plasma?
Answer:
Lymph is a colourless fluid. It lacks RBC, platelets, and large plasma proteins, but has more number of leucocytes. It is chiefly composed of plasma and lymphocytes.

Question 24.
What is the hematocrit value?
Answer:
The percentage of the total volume occupied by RBCs in the blood is called the hematocrit value.

Question 25.
What are intercalated discs? What is their significance?
Answer:
The dark lines across cardiac muscle are called intercalated discs (IDS). These discs are highly characteristic of the cardie muscle.

Question 26.
“Cardiac muscle is highly resistant to fatigue”. Justify.
Answer:
The cardiac muscle is highly resistant to fatigue because it has numerous acrosomes, many molecules of myoglobin (Oxygen storing pigment), and a copious supply of blood which facilitate continuous aerobic respiration. The muscles are immune to fatigue and work tirelessly from the embryonic state until death.

Question 27.
Distinguish between ‘nucleus’ and ‘ganglion’ with respect to the nervous system.
Answer:
A group of cell bodies in the Central Nervous System is called a ‘nucleus’, and in the Peripheral Nervous System, it is called a ‘ganglion’.

Question 28.
Distinguish between tracts and nerves with respect to the nervous system.
Answer:
Groups of axons (nerve fibers) in the central nervous system (CNS) are called tracts’ and in the peripheral nervous system (PNS) they are called ‘nerves’.

Question 29.
Name the glial cells that form the myelin sheath around the axons of the central nervous system and peripheral nervous system respectively.
Answer:
In the central nervous system, the glial cells are called ‘Oligodendrocytes’, in the peripheral nervous system, the glial cells are called Schwann cells.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals

Question 30.
Distinguish between white matter and Greymatter of ‘CNS’.
Answer:
Myelinated nerve fibers occur in the white matter of the CNS, and in most peripheral nerves, and Non-myelinated axons are commonly found in the grey matter of the CNS and autonomous nervous system.

Question 31.
What are microglia and what is their origin add a note on their function.
Answer:
Microglial cells are the Neurogila (supporting cells) of cells of CNS which are phagocytic cells, of mesodermal origin.

Question 32.
What are pseudounipolar neurons? Where do you find them?
Answer:
In a unipolar neuron, the soma or cyton is found in the dorsal root ganglion they are called pseudounipolar neurons. These are found in spinal nerves.

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Describe the four different levels of organization in metazoans.
Answer:
The levels of organisation in metazoans are as follows:
1. Cellular level of organisation: It is the lowest level of organisaiton among the metazoans and ‘ is exhibited by the sponges. Different types of cells are functionally isolated due to the absence of sensory and nerve cells. There is no uniformity of labor among the cells and they don’t form tissues.

2. Tissue level of organisation: This is the lowest level of organisation among the eumetazoans, exhibited by diploblastic animals like the cnidarians. In these animals, the cells which perform the same function are arranged into tissues due to the presence of nerve cells and sensory cells.

3. Organ level of organisation: An aggregation of different kinds of tissues that are specialized for a particular function is called an organ. Organ level of organisation is a further advancement over the tissue level in the evolution of levels of organisation. It is the first time appeared in the members of platyhelminths.

4. Organ-system level: It is the highest level of organisation among the animals and is exhibited by triploblastic animals such as the flatworms, nematodes, annelids, arthropods, molluscs, echinodermates, and chordates. High specilized sensory and nerve cells bring about a higher level of coordination and integration among the various organ systems to lead an efficient way of life.

Question 2.
In which group of bilaterians do you find solid bauplan? Why is it called so?
Answer:
The bilaterian’s body plan is the solid bauplan when only one plane that passes through the identical axis divides an organism into two identical parts, it is called bilateral symmetry. It is the principal type of symmetry in triploblastic animals.

Bilaterally symmetrical animals are more efficient than the other animals in seeking food locating mates and in avoiding or escaping from predators, because of cephalization. As a result of cephalization, bilaterally symmetrical animals can sense the new environment into which they enter and respond more efficiently and quickly.

Question 3.
Mention the advantages of coelom over pseudocolor.
Answer:
Advantages of coelom over pseudocoelom:
1. Visceral organs of eucoelomates are muscular (because of their association with mesoderm) and so they can contract and relax freely independent of the muscular movements of the body wall in the coelomic space, e.g.: peristaltic movements of the alimentary canal.
2. Gametes are released into the coelom in some invertebrates (which do not have glnoducts) and in the female vertebrates.
3. Coelomic fluid receives excretory products and stores them temporarily before their elimination.
4. In the eucoelomates, the mesoderm comes into contact with the endoderm of the alimentary canal, and it causes ‘regional specialization of the gut, such as the development of gizzard, stomach, etc., This is referred to as ‘primary induction’. In the case of the pseudocoelomates, due to the absence of such a contract between the gut and the mesoderm, the wall of the gut does not show complex and highly specialized organs.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals

Question 4.
Describe the formation of schizocoelom and enterocoelom.
Answer:
Schizocoelom: During embryonic development, a specialized cell called 4d blastomere is formed. The cells formed from these cells divide and redivide and develop blocks of mesoderm in blastocoel. The blocks fuse and form the mesodermal band which later on splits to form the Schizocoelom. This type of coelom is present in Annelida, Arthropoda, and Mollusca.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals SAQ Q4

Enterocoelomates: Animals in which the body cavity is formed from the mesodermal pouches of archenteron are called enterocoelomates. Echinoderms, hemichordates, and chordates are enterocoelomates. In these animals, mesodermal ouches that evaginate from the wall of the archenteron into the blastocoel are fused with one another to form the enterocoelom. All the enterocoelomates are deuterostomes and they show radial and indeterminate cleavage.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals SAQ Q4.1

Question 5.
Describe briefly the three types of intercellular junctions of epithelial tissues.
Answer:
The specialized ‘junctions’ provide both structural and functional links between the individual cells of an epithelium. They show different types of junctions so as to serve the specific needs of that tissue. They are
(A) Tight junctions: These junctions between epithelial cells prevent ‘leakages’ of body fluids. For example, they prevent leakages of water into the surrounding cells in our sweat glands. The plasma membranes of adjacent cells are tightly pressed against each other and are bound together by specific proteins.

(B) Desmosomes: Muscle cells are provided with “desmosomes” (anchoring junctions) which act as ‘rivets’ binding the cells together into strong sheets. Intermediate filaments made of protein ‘keratin’ anchor desmosomes in the cytoplasm.

(C) Gap junctions: They provide continuous cytoplasmic channels between adjacent cells. Various types of ions, sugar molecules amino acids, etc. can pass from a cell to an adjacent cell through ‘gap junctions. They occur in many types of tissues including the ‘cardiac muscles’ where they allow rapid conduction of impulses or depolarization.

Question 6.
Give an account of glandular epithelium.
Answer:
Glandular epithelium: Some of the columnar or cuboidal cells that get specialised for the production of certain secretions, form glandular epithelium. The glands are of two types.
Unicellular glands: Consisting of isolated glandular cells such as goblet cells of the gut.
Multicellular glands: Consisting of clusters of cells such as salivary glands. On the basis of the mode of pouring of their secretions, glands are divided into two types namely exocrine and endocrine glands.
Exocrine glands: These glands provided with ducts secrete mucus, saliva, earwax, oil, milk, digestive enzymes, etc.
Endocrine glands: These glands are ductless and their products are hormones, which are carried to the target organs by blood.
Based on the mode of secretion, Exocrine glands are further divided into three types.
1. Merocrine glands: Which release the secretory granules without the loss of other cellular material.
Ex: Pancreas
2. Apocrineglands: The apical part of the cell is pinched off along with the secretory product.
Ex: Mammary glands
3. Holocrine glands: The entire cell disintegrates to discharge the contents.
Ex: Sebaceous gland

Question 7.
Give a brief account of the cells of areolar tissue.
Answer:
Areolar tissue: It is one of the most widely distributed connective tissue in the body. It forms the packing tissue in almost all organs. Areolar tissue forms the subcutaneous layer of the skin. It has cells and fibres. Cells of the areolar tissue are fibroblasts, mast cells, macrophages, adipocytes, and plasma cells.
1. Fibroblasts are the most common cells which secrete fibres. The inactive cells are called fibrocytes.
2. Mast cells secrete heparin (an anticoagulant), histamine, bradykinin (vasodilators), and serotonin vasoconstrictor). Vasodilators cause inflammation in response to injury and infection.
3. Macrophages are amoeboid cells, Phagocytic in function, and act as internal scavengers. They are derived from the monocytes of blood. Tissue-fixed macrophages’ are called histiocytes and others are ‘wandering macrophages’.
4. Plasma cells are derived from the B-lymphocytes and produce antibodies.
5. Adipocytes are specialized cells for the storage of fats.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals SAQ Q7

Question 8.
Describe the three types of cartilage.
Answer:
Cartilage is a solid, but semi-rigid (flexible) connective tissue. Cartilage is of three types, which differ from each other chiefly in the composition of the matrix.

Cartilage is a solid, but semi-rigid (flexible) connective tissue It resists compression. Matrix is firm but somewhat pliable. It has collagen fibres, elastic fibres (only in the elastic cartilage), and matrix-secreting cells called chondroblasts. These cells are enclosed in fluid-filled spaces called lacunae. Chocolates are the inactive cells of cartilage. Cartilage is surrounded by a fibrous connective tissue sheath called perichondrium. Cartilage is of three types, which differ from each other chiefly in the composition of the matrix.

1. Hyaline cartilage: It is bluish-white, translucent, and glass-like cartilage. Matrix is homogeneous and shows delicate collagen fibres. It is the weakest and the most common type of cartilage. It is found in the walls of the nose, larynx, trachea, and bronchi.

2. Elastic cartilage: It is yellowish due to elastic fibres. Matrix has an abundance of yellow elastic fibres in addition to collagen fibres. It provides strength and elasticity. Perichondrium is present. It is found in the pinnae of the external ears, Eustachian tubes, and epiglottis.

3. Fibrous cartilage: Matrix has bundles of collagen fibres. The perichondrium is absent. It is the strongest of all types of cartilage. It occurs in the Intervertebral discs and pubic symphysis of the pelvis.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals SAQ Q8

Question 9.
Explain the Haversian system.
Answer:
The compact bone consists of several structural units called Osteons or Haversian systems arranged around and parallel to the bone marrow cavities.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals SAQ Q9
The Haversian system consists of a Haversian canal that runs parallel to the marrow cavity. It contains an artery, a vein, and a lymphatic vessel. The Haversian canal is surrounded by concentric lamellae. Small fluid-filled spaces called ‘lacunae’ provided with minute canaliculi lie in between the lamellae. Canaliculi connect the lacunae with one another and with the Haversian canal.

Each lacuna encloses one osteocyte (an inactive form of osteoblast). The cytoplasmic processes of osteocytes extend through canaliculi. A Haversian canal and the surrounding lamellae and lacunae are collectively called a Haversian system or osteon. The Haversian canals communicate with one another, with the perio¬steum and also with the marrow cavity by transverse or oblique canals called Volkmann’s canals. Nutrients and gases diffuse from the vascular supply of Haversian canals.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals

Question 10.
Write short notes on lymph.
Answer:
Lymph: Lymph is a colourless fluid. It lacks RBC, platelets, and large plasma proteins, but has more number of leucocytes. It is chiefly composed of plasma and lymphocytes. When compared to the tissue fluid, it contains very small amounts of nutrients and oxygen but has abundant CO2 and other metabolites.

The most important site of the formation of lymph is the interstitial space. As blood passes through the blood capillaries, some portion of blood that includes water, solutes, and proteins of low molecular weight passer: through the walls of capillaries, into the interstitial spaces due to hydrostatic pressure at the arteriolar ends. This fluid forms the interstitial fluid (tissue fluid). Most of the interstitial fluid is returned directly to the capillaries due to osmotic pressure at the venular ends.

A little amount of this tissue fluid passes through a system of lymphatic capillaries (lymph capillaries of the intestinal villi are called ‘lacteals’), vessels, and ducts and finally, reaches the blood through the subclavian veins. The extracellular ’tissue fluid’ that passes into the lymph capillaries and lymph vessels is called ‘lymph’. The lymphatic system represents an ‘accessory route’ by which interstitial fluid flows from tissue spaces into blood.

Question 11.
Describe the structure of a skeletal muscle.
Answer:
Skeletal (striped and voluntary) muscle:
It is usually attached to skeletal structures by ‘tendons’. In a typical muscle such as the ‘biceps’ muscle, skeletal muscle fibre is surrounded by a thin connective tissue sheath, the endomysium. A bundle of muscle fibres is called a fascicle. It is surrounded by a connective tissue sheath called perimysium. A group of fascicles forms a ‘muscle’ which is surrounded by an epimysium (outermost connective tissue sheath). These connective tissue layers may extend beyond the muscle to form a chord-like tendon or sheet-like aponeurosis.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals SAQ Q11
A skeletal muscle fibre is a long, cylindrical, and unbranched cell. It is a multinucleated cell with many oval nuclei characteristically in the ‘peripheral’ cytoplasm (a syncytium formed by the fusion of cells). Sarcoplasm has many myofibrils which show alternate dark and light bands. So it is called striped or striated muscle.

Question 12.
Describe the structure of a cardiac muscle.
Answer:
Cardiac (striped and involuntary) muscle: The cardiac muscle is striated like the skeletal muscle (shows sarcomeres). Cardiac muscle is found in the ‘myocardium’ of the heart of vertebrates. The cardiac muscle cells or the myocardial cells’ are short, cylindrical, mononucleate, or binucleate cells whose ends branch and form junctions with other cardiac muscle cells. Each myocardial cell is joined to adjacent myocardial cells by ‘electrical synapses’ or ‘gap junctions. They permit ‘electrical impulses to be conducted along the long axis of the cardiac muscle fibre. The dark lines across cardiac muscle are called intercalated discs (IDs). These discs are highly characteristic of the cardiac muscle.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals SAQ Q12

Question 13.
Give an account of the supporting cells of nervous tissue.
Answer:
Nervous tissue is of two types.
1. Nervous
2. Supporting cell or neuroglia

Neuroglia (supporting cells): These are the supporting and non-conducting cells that provide a microenvironment suitable for neuronal activity. Unlike neurons, they continue to divide throughout life. Neuroglial cells of the CNS include oligodendrocytes (that form myelin sheath as mentioned above); astrocytes (star-shaped cells) that form an interconnected network and bind neurons and capillaries (helping in providing the blood-brain barrier); ependymal cells, which are ciliated cells that line the cavities of the brain and spinal cord to bring movements in the cerebrospinal fluid; microglial cells, which are phagocytic cells, of mesodermal origin. Neuroglial cells of the peripheral nervous system include the satellite cells and Schwann cells. Satellite cells surround the cell bodies in ganglia, and Schwann cells form neurolemma around axons.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals

Question 14.
Describe the structure of a multipolar neuron.
Answer:
Multipolar neurons have one axon and two or more dendrites. Most neurons in our body are multipolar neurons.
A neuron usually consists of a cell body with one too many dendrites and a single axon.

Neurons: Neurons are the ‘functional units of nervous tissue. These are electrically excitable cells that receive, initiate, and conduct/transmit impulses. When a neuron is stimulated, an electric disturbance (action potential) is generated which swiftly travels along its plasma membrane. A neuron usually consists of a “cell body” with one to many dendrites and a single axon.

Cell body: It is also called perikaryon, cyton, or soma. It contains abundant granular cytoplasm and a large spherical nucleus. The cytoplasm has Nissl bodies (they represent RER, the sites of protein synthesis), neurofibrils, and lipofuscin granules.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals SAQ Q14
Dendrites: Several short, branched processes that arise from the cyton are called dendrites. They also contain Nissl bodies and neurofibrils. They conduct nerve impulses towards the cell body (afferent processes).

Axon: An axon is a single, long, cylindrical process that originates from a region of the cyton called the axon hillock. The Plasmalemma of an axon is called axolemma, and the cytoplasm is called axoplasm, which contains neurofibrils. However, Nissl bodies are absent. An axon may give rise to collateral branches. Distally it branches into many fine filaments called telodendrites, (axon terminals), which end in bulb-like structures called synaptic knobs or terminal boutons. Synaptic knobs possess ‘synaptic vesicles’ containing chemicals called neurotransmitters.

Question 15.
Write short notes on (a) Platelets and (a) Synapse.
Answer:
(a) Blood platelets (Thrombocytes): These are colourless non- nucleated, round or oval biconvex discs. The number of platelets per cubic mm of blood is about 2,50,000-4,50,000. They are formed from giant megakaryocytes produced in the red bone marrow by fragmentation. The average lifespan of blood platelets is about 5 to 9 days. They secrete thromboplastin and play an important role in blood clotting. They adhere to the damaged endothelial lining of capillaries and seal minor vascular openings.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals SAQ Q15
(b) Synapse: It is the place in between the two neurons or inter-neuronal or neuromuscular junctions. Nerve cells do not have direct contact with each other. There is a microscopic gap of about 200-300 A° present between the nerve cells called a synapse. The nerve cell present before synapse is called the presynaptic neuron and the behind is called the post-synaptic neuron. A neurotransmitter substance called acetylcholine is secreted in the synapse by presynaptic neurons’ telodendrites. Acetylcholine helps in the conduction of nerve impulses from one neuron to another neuron.

Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What is coelom? Explain the different types of coelom with suitable examples and neat labelled diagrams.
Answer:
The body cavity, which is lined by mesoderm, is called coelom more elaborately, coelom is a fluid-filled space between the body wall and visceral organs and lined by mesodermal epithelium peritoneum. Based on the body cavity triploblastic animals can be classified into acoelomentes, pseudo-coelo mates, and coelomates.

Acoelomate bilaterians: The bilaterian animals in which the body cavity is absent are called acoelomates, e.g. Platy-helminthes (lowest bilaterians). In these animals, the mesenchyme derived from the thrid germinal layer, called mesoderm, occupies the entire blasto coel, between the ectoderm and the endoderm, so that the adults have neither the primary cavity (blasto-coelom) nor the secondary cavity (coelom). As there is no body cavity, the acoelomates exhibit a solid body plan.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q1

Pseudocoelomate bilaterians: In some animals, the body cavity is not lined by mesodermal epithelia. Such animals are called Pseudocoelomates. They include the members of phylum Aschelminthes (Nematoda, Rotifera, and some minor phyla). During embryonic development mesoderm (mesenchyme) occupies only a part of the blastocoel adjoining the ectoderm. The unoccupied portion of the blastocoel persists as pseudocoelom.

Eucoelomate bilaterians: Coelom or ‘true coelom’ is a fluid-filled cavity, that lies between the body wall and the visceral organs and is lined by mesodermal epithelium, the peritoneum. The portion of the peritoneum that underlines the body wall is the parietal peritoneum or somatic peritoneum. The portion of the peritoneum that covers the visceral organs is the splanchnic peritoneum or visceral peritoneum. In coelomates, the visceral organs are suspended in the coelom by the peritoneum.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q1.1
During the embryonic development of the eucoelomates, the blastocoel is replaced by the true coelom derived from the mesoderm. So, the true coelom is also called the ‘secondary body cavity. Based on the mode of formation of coelom, the eucoelomates are classified into two types:

I. Schizocoelomates: Animals in which the body cavity is formed by the ‘splitting of mesoderm’ are called schizocoelomates. Annelids, arthropods, and mollusks are schizocoelomates in the animal kingdom. All the schizocoelomates are protostomians and they show ‘holoblastic’, ‘spiral’, and ‘determinate’ cleavage. The 4d blastomere or mesentoblast cell of the early embryo divides to form mesodermal blocks between the ectoderm and the endoderm and replaces the blastocoel. The split that appears in each mesodermal block leads to the formation of Schizocoelom.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q1.2

II. Enterocoelomates: Animals in which the body cavity is formed from the mesodermal pouches of archenteron are called enterocoelomates. Echinoderms, hemichordates, and chordates are the enterocoelomates. In these animals, mesodermal pouches that evaginate from the wall of the archenteron into the blastocoel are fused with one another to form the enterocoelom. All the enterocoelomates are deuterostomes and they show radial and indeterminate cleavage.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q1.3

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals

Question 2.
What is symmetry? Describe the different types of symmetry in the animal kingdom with suitable examples.
Answer:
Symmetry: The concept of symmetry is fundamental in understanding the organisation of an animal. Symmetry in animals is the balanced distribution of paired body parts. The body plan of a vast majority of metazoans exhibits some kind of symmetry. However, most of the sponges and snails show asymmetry (lack of symmetry). The symmetry of an animal and its mode of life are correlated.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q2
Asymmetry: The animals, which cannot be cut into two equal parts (antimeres) in any plane passing through the centre of the body is called asymmetrical, e.g.: most sponges and adult gastropods. In asymmetrical animals, the body lacks a definite form.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q2.1
Symmetry: The regular arrangement of body parts in a geometrical design relative to the axis of the body is called symmetry. In a symmetrical animal, paired body parts are arranged on either side of the plane passing through the principal axis, such that they are equidistant from the plane. The unpaired body parts are located mostly on the plane, passing through the principal axis.
Basically, the symmetry in animals is of two kinds:
(i) Radial symmetry
(ii) Bilateral symmetry

(i) Radial Symmetry or Monaxial heteropolar Symmetry: When any plane passing through the central axis (oro-aboral axis/principal axis) of the body divides an organism into two identical parts, it is called radial symmetry. The animals with radial symmetry are either sessile or planktonic or sluggish forms. It is the principal symmetry of the diploblastic animals such as the cnidarians and ctenophores symmetrical (as it is five-angled, it is also called pentamerous radial symmetry). Radially symmetrical animals have many planes of symmetry, whereas pentamerous radially symmetrical animals have five planes of symmetry.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q2.2

(ii) Bilateral symmetry: When only one plane (median sagittal plane) that passes through the central axis (anterior-posterior axis) divides an organism into two identical parts, it is called bilateral symmetry. It is the ‘principal type of symmetry’ in triploblastic animals. Among the triploblastic animals, some gastropods become secondarily asymmetrical though they have primarily bilaterally symmetrical larvae.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q2.3
Bilaterally symmetrical animals are more efficient than other animals in seeking food, locating mates, and in avoiding or escaping from predators, because of cephalization (concentration of nerve and sensory cells at the anterior end). As a result of cephalization, bilaterally symmetrical animals can sense the new environment into which they enter and respond more efficiently and quickly.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q2.4

Question 3.
Classify and describe the epithelial tissues on the basis of structural modification of cells with examples.
Answer:
Epithelium (epi-upon; thelia – growing) forms the outer covering of the body and the living of internal organs and cavities. There are two types of epithelial tissues namely ‘simple epithelia1 and ‘compound epithelia’ based on the number of layers or strata.

Simple epithelium is composed of a single layer of cells and forms the lining of body cavities, ducts, and vessels. It helps in the diffusion, absorption, filtration, and secretion of substances. On the basis of the shape of the cells, it is further divided into three types:
(i) Simple squamous epithelium (Pavement epithelium): It is composed of a single layer of flat and tile-like cells, each with a centrally located ‘ovoid nucleus’. It is found in the endothelium of blood vessels, mesothelium of body cavities (pleura, peritoneum, and pericardium), wall of Bowman’s capsule of the nephron, lining of alveoli of lungs, etc.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q3

(ii) Simple cuboidal epithelium: It is composed of a single layer of cube-like cells with centrally located spherical nuclei. It is found in germinal epi – thelium, proximal, and distal convoluted tubules of the nephron. Cuboidal epithelium of proximal convoluted tubule of nephron has ‘microvilli’.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q3.1

(iii) Simple columnar epithelium: It is composed of a single layer of tall and slender cells with oval nuclei located near the base. It has mucus-secreting ‘goblet cells’ in some places. It is of two types:
(a) Ciliated columnar epithelium: Columnar epithelial cells have cilia on their free surface. It is mainly present in the inner surface of hollow organs like fallopian tubes, ventricles of the brain, the central canal of the spinal cord, bronchioles, etc.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q3.2

(b) Non-ciliated columnar epithelium: Columnar cells are without cilia. It is found in the lining of the stomach and intestine. Microvilli are present in the columnar epithelium of the intestine to increase the surface area of absorption.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q3.3

(II) Compound epithelium (stratified epithelium): It is made up of more than one layer of cells. Its main function is to provide protection against chemical and mechanical stress. It covers the dry surface of the skin as stratified, keratinized, squamous epithelium. It covers the moist surface of the buccal cavity, pharynx, esophagus, and vagina as stratified non-keratinized squamous epithelium. It forms the inner lining of the larger ducts of salivary glands, sweat glands, and pancreatic ducts as stratified cuboidal epithelium. It forms the wall of the urinary bladder as transitional epithelium.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q3.4

(III) Glandular epithelium: Some of the columnar or cuboidal cells that get specialised for the production of certain secretions, form glandular epithelium. The glands are of two types – unicellular glands consisting of isolated glandular cells such as goblet cells of the gut, and multicellular glands, consisting of clusters of cells such as salivary glands. On the basis of the mode of pouring of their secretions, glands are divided into two types namely exocrine and endocrine glands. Exocrine glands are provided with ducts; that secrete mucus, saliva, earwax (cerumen), oil, milk, digestive enzymes, and other cell products. In contrast, endocrine glands are ductless and their products are ‘hormones’, which are not sent out via ducts, but are carried to the target organs by blood.

Based on the mode of secretion, exocrine glands are further divided into
(i) merocrine glands (e.g.: pancreas) which release the secretory granules without the loss of other cellular material.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q3.5
(ii) Apocrine glands (e.g.: mammary glands) in which the apical part of the cell is pinched off along with the secretory product and
(iii) Holocrine glands (e.g.: sebaceous glands), in which the entire cell disintegrates to discharge the contents.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals

Question 4.
Describe the various types of connective tissue properly with suitable examples.
Answer:
Connective tissue proper is of two types as
(A) Loose connective tissue proper
(B) Dense connective tissue proper

(A) Loose connective tissue: Cells and fibres are loosely arranged in a semi-fluid ground substance there are three types of loose connective tissues-areolar tissue adipose tissue and reticular tissue.
(i) Areolar tissue: It is one of the most widely distributed connective tissues in the body. It forms the packing tissue in almost all organs. Areolar tissue forms the subcutaneous layer of the skin. It has cells and fibres. Cells of the areolar tissue are the fibroblasts, mast cells, macrophages, adipocytes, and plasma cells.
1. Fibroblasts are the most common cells with secreted fibres. The inactive cells are called
fibrocytes.
2. Mast cells secrete heparin (an anticoagulant), histamine, bradykinin (vasodilators), and serotonin (vasoconstrictor), vasodilators cause inflammation in response to injury and infection.
3. Macrophages are amoeboid cells, phagocytic in function, and act as internal scavengers. They are derived from the monocytes of blood. ‘Tissue fixed macrophages’ are called histiocytes and others are ‘wandering macrophages’.
4. Plasma cells are derived from the B-lymphocytes and produce antibodies.
5. Adipocytes are specialized cells for the storage of fats.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q4

(ii) Adipose tissue: It is specialized for fat storage. It consists of a large number of adipocytes and few fibres. The adipose tissue which is found beneath the skin provides. Adipose tissue is of two types: white adipose tissue, and brown adipose tissue. Excess nutrients which are not used immediately are converted into fats and stored in this tissue.
White adipose tissue (WAT): It is the predominant type in adults, and the adipocyte has a single large lipid droplet (monocular). White fat is metabolically not active.
Brown adipose tissue (BAT): It is found in fetuses and infants. Adipocyte of BAT has several small ‘lipid droplets’ (multilocular) and numerous mitochondria. Brown fat is metabolically active and generates ‘heat’ to maintain the body temperature required by infants.

(iii) Reticular tissue: It has specialized fibroblasts called reticular cells. They secrete ‘reticular fibers’ that form an interconnecting network. It forms the ‘supporting framework’ of lymphoid organs such as bone marrow, spleen, and lymph nodes and forms the reticular lamina of the ‘basement membrane’.

(B) Dense connective tissue: This tissue consists of more fibres, but fewer cells. It has very little ground substance. Based on the arrangement of fibres, the dense connective tissue is of three types.
(i) Dense regular connective tissue: In this tissue, collagen fibres are arranged parallel to one another in bundles. Tendons that attach the skeletal muscles to bones and ligaments which attach bones to other bones are examples of this type of connective tissue.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q4.1

(ii) Dense irregular connective tissue: In this type of connective tissue, bundles of collagen fibres are irregularly arranged. Periosteum, endosteum, pericardium, heart valves, joint capsule, and deeper region of the dermis of skin contain/are made up of this type of connective tissue.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q4.2

(iii) Elastic connective tissue: It is mainly made of yellow elastic fibres, capable of considerable extension and recoil. This tissue can recoil to its original shape, when the forces of stretch are released. It occurs in the wall of arteries, vocal cords, trachea, bronchi, and ‘elastic ligaments’ present between vertebrae.

In addition to the above-mentioned connective tissues, mucous connective tissue occurs as foetal or embryonic connective tissue. It is present in the umbilical cord as Wharton’s jelly.

Question 5.
What is skeletal tissue? Describe the various types of skeletal tissue.
Answer:
Skeletal tissue (supporting tissue): It forms the endoskeleton of the vertebrates. It supports the body, protects various organs, provides a surface for the attachment of muscles, and helps in locomotion. It is of two types:
(A) Cartilage (Gristle): Cartilage is a solid, but semi-rigid (flexible) connective tissue. It resists compression. Matrix is firm but somewhat pliable. It has collagen fibres, elastic fibres (only in the elastic cartilage), and matrix-secreting cells called chondroblasts. These cells are enclosed in fluid-filled spaces called lacunae. Chondrocytes are the inactive cells of cartilage. Cartilage is surrounded by a fibrous connective tissue sheath called perichondrium.

Cartilage is of three types, which differ from each other chiefly in the composition of the matrix.
1. Hyaline cartilage: It is bluish-white, translucent, and glass-like cartilage. Matrix is homogeneous and shows delicate collagen fibres. It is the weakest and the most common type of cartilage. It is found in the walls of the nose, Larynx, trachea, and bronchi.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q5

2. Elastic cartilage: It is yellowish due to elastic fibres. Matrix has an abundance of yellow elastic fibres in addition to collagen fibres. It provides strength and elasticity. Perichondrium is present. It is found in the pinnae of the external ears, Eustachian tubes, and epiglottis.

3. Fibrous cartilage: Matrix has bundles of collagen fibres. The perichondrium is absent. It is the strongest of all types of cartilage. It occurs in the intervertebral discs and pubic symphysis of the pelvis.

(B) Bone (osseous) tissue: Bone is highly calcified (mineralized), solid, hard and rigid connective tissue. It is the major component of the endoskeleton of most adult vertebrates.

Bone has an outer fibrous connective tissue sheath called periosteum, the inner connective tissue sheath that lines the marrow cavity called the endosteum, a non-living extracellular matrix, living cells, and bone marrow. Bone cells include osteoblasts, osteocytes, and osteoclasts. Osteoblasts (immature bone cells) secrete the organic components (collagen fibres) of the matrix and also play an important role in the ‘mineralization of bone’ and become osteocytes (mature bone cells). Osteocytes are enclosed in fluid-filled lacunae. Osteoclasts are phagocytic cells involved in the resorption of bone.

Types of bones based on the method of formation:
(i) Cartilage bones (replacing bones or endochondral bones) are formed by ossification within the cartilage e.g. bones of limbs, girdles, and vertebrae.
(ii) Investing bones (membrane bones or dermal bones) are formed by the ossification in the embryonic mesenchyme e.g. most of the bones of the cranium.
(iii) Sesamoid bones are formed by ossification in tendons e.g.: patella (knee cap) and pisiform bone of the wrist of a mammal
(iv) are formed by ossification in the soft tissues, e.g.: Oscordis (inside the heart of ruminants), and Ospenis (inside the glans-penis of many mammals such as rodents, bats, and carnivores).

Types of bones based on the structure:
1. Spongy bone (Cancellous bone or trabecular bone): It occurs in the epiphyses and metaphyses
of long bones. It looks spongy and contains columns of bone called ‘trabeculae’ with irregular interspaces filled with red bone marrow.
2. Compact bone: The diaphysis of a long bone is made up of ‘compact bone. It has a dense continuous lamellar matrix between the periosteum and endosteum.

Structure of a compact bone: Diaphysis (shaft) is a part of a long bone that lies in between expanded ends. The diaphysis is covered by a dense connective fibrous tissue called the periosteum. The diaphysis of a long bone has a hollow cavity called marrow cavity which is lined or surrounded by the endosteum. In between periosteum and endosteum, the matrix of the bone is laid down in the form of ‘lamellae’. Outer circumferential lamellae are located immediately beneath the periosteum; inner circumferential lamellae are located around the endosteum.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q5.1
Between the outer and inner circumferential lamellae, there are many Haversian systems (osteons – units of bone). The spaces between the Haversian systems are filled with interstitial lamellae. Haversian system consists of a Haversian canal that runs parallel to the marrow cavity. It contains an artery, a vein and a lymphatic vessel. Haversian canal is surrounded by concentric lamellae. Small fluid filled spaces called ‘lacunae’ provided with minute canaliculi lie in between the lamellae.

Canaliculi connect the lacunae with one another and with Haversian canal. Each lacuna encloses one osteocyte (inactive form of osteoblast). The cytoplasmic processes of osteocytes extend through canaliculi. A Haversian canal and the surrounding lamellae and lacunae are collectively called a Haversian system or osteon. The Haversian canals communicate with one another, with the periosteum and also with the marrow cavity by transverse or oblique canals called Volkmanns canals. Nutrients and gases diffuse from the vascular supply of Haversian canals.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals

Question 6.
Give an account of the “formed elements” of Blood.
Answer:
Blood is a red-coloured, opaque, and slightly alkaline fluid. It is composed of blood plasma and formed elements or blood cells – the RBC, WBC, and platelets.
Formed elements of Blood cells: The blood corpuscles (RBC and WBC) constitute 45% of the total blood by volume.

(i) Red blood corpuscles (Erythrocytes): Erythrocytes of mammals are circular (elliptical in camels and Liamas), biconcave and enucleate. The biconcave shape provides a large surface area-to-volume ratio, thus providing more area for the exchange of gases. These are 7.8 pm in diameter. The number of RBCs per cubic millimeter of blood is about 5 million in a man and 4.5 million in a woman.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q6

(ii) White blood corpuscles (Leucocytes): These are nucleate, colourless, complete cells. They are spherical or irregular in shape and are capable of exhibiting amoeboid movement into the extravascular areas by diapedesis. WBC are two main types: 1) Granulocytes and 2) Agranulocytes.

Granulocytes: They possess cytoplasmic granules that may take three different types of stains, neutral or acidic, or basic. The nucleus of the granulocytes is divided into lobes and assumes different shapes, hence, these are also called polymorphonuclear leucocytes. Based on the staining properties these are of three tvoes.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q6.1

Basophils: They constitute about 0.4% of the total leucocytes. The nucleus is divided into irregular lobes. Cytoplasmic granules are ‘fewer’ and ‘irregular’ in shape. They take basic stains. They produce heparin, histamine, etc. They supplement the function of mast cells when needed.

Eosinophils (acidophils): They constitute about 2.3% of the total leucocytes. The nucleus is distinctly bilobed. The cytoplasm has large granules which stain with acidic dyes such as ‘eosin’.

Neutrophils: They constitute about 62% of the total leucocytes. The nucleus is many lobed (2-5). Specific cytoplasmic granules are small and abundant. They stain with ‘neutral dyes’.

Agranulocytes: Cytoplasmic granules are absent in agranulocytes. divided into lobes. These are of two types:
(a) Lymphocytes: They constitute about 30% of the total leucocytes. They are small, spherical cells with large spherical nuclei and scanty peripheral cytoplasm. There are functionally two types of lymphocytes – ‘B’ lymphocytes, which produce ‘antibodies’ and T lymphocytes which play a key role in the immunological reactions of the body. Some lymphocytes live only a few days while others survive for many years.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q6.2

(b) Monocytes: They constitute about 5.3% of the leucocytes. The nucleus is kidney-shaped (reniform). These are the largest, motile phagocytes. They engulf bacteria and cellular debris. They differentiate into macrophages when they enter the connective tissues.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q6.3

(iii) Blood platelets (Thrombocytes): These are colourless non-nucleated, round, or oval biconvex discs. The number of platelets per cubic mm of blood is about 2,50,000-4,50,000. They are formed from giant megakaryocytes produced in the red bone marrow by fragmentation. The average lifespan of blood platelets is about 5 to 9 days. They secrete thromboplastin and play an important role in blood clotting. They adhere to the damaged endothelial lining of capillaries and seal minor vascular openings.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q6.4

Question 7.
Compare and contrast the three types of muscular tissues.
Answer:
Muscular tissue is mesodermal in origin. Muscles show three essential properties such as excitability, conductivity, and contractility. The study of muscular tissues is known as mycology. Muscular tissue has elongated cells called ‘muscle fibers’ (myocytes) which are surrounded by a connective tissue sheath. The extracellular matrix is absent. The plasma membrane of a muscle fiber is called sarcolemma.

The cytoplasm of a muscle fibre is called Sarco plasm, the endoplasmic reticulum, the sarcoplasmic reticulum, and the mitochondria, the Sarcosomes. The cytoplasm of a muscle fibre has several myofibrils. Each myofibril has thick (myosin) and thin (actin) myofilaments. The regular arrangement of myosin and actin filaments is responsible for the alternate dark and light bands of a ‘striated muscle’. Sarcoplasm also contains ATP, phosphocreatine, glycogen, and myoglobin. Muscles are of three types – skeletal, smooth, and cardiac.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q7

Skeletal (striped and voluntary) muscle: It is usually attached to skeletal structures by ‘tendons’. A typical muscle such as the ‘biceps’ muscle/skeletal muscle fibre is surrounded by a thin connective tissue sheath, the endomysium. A bundle of muscle fibres is called a fascicle.

It is surrounded by a connective tissue sheath called perimysium. A group of fascicles forms a ‘muscle’ that is surrounded by an epimysium (outermost connective tissue sheath). These connective tissue layers may extend beyond the muscle to form a chord-like tendon or sheet¬like aponeurosis.

A skeletal muscle fibre is a long, cylindrical, and unbranched cell. It is a multinucleated cell with many oval nuclei characteristically in the “peripheral” cytoplasm (a syncytium formed by the fusion of cells). Sarcoplasm has many myofibrils which show alternate dark and light bands. So it is called striped or striated muscle.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q7.1

Smooth (unstriped and involuntary muscle): It is located in the walls of the visceral organs such as blood vessels, trachea, bronchi, stomach, intestine, excretory and genital ducts, and so this is also called ‘visceral muscle’. As cross striations are absent, it is called ‘smooth muscle. It is also found in the iris and ciliary body of the eye and in the skin as ‘arrector pili muscles that are attached to hair follicles.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q7.2
Usually, smooth muscles are arranged in ‘layers’/’sheets’. A smooth muscle fibre is a spindle-shaped (fusiform), uninucleate cell. Myofibrils do not show alternate dark and light bands due to the irregular arrangement of actin and myosin fibres. They do not work under conscious control, and so they are called involuntary muscles. Smooth muscles exhibit ‘slow’ and ‘prolonged’ contractions. They may remain contracted for long periods without fatigue (show sustained involuntary contractions called ‘spasms’). The contraction of smooth muscles is under the control of the autonomous nervous system.

AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals

Cardiac (striped and involuntary) muscle: The cardiac muscle is striated like the skeletal muscle (shows sarcomeres). Cardiac muscle is found in the ‘myocardium’ of the heart of vertebrates. The cardiac muscle cells or the ‘myocardial cells’ are short, cylindrical, mononucleate, or binucleate cells whose ends branch and form junctions with other cardiac muscle cells. Each myocardial cell is joined to adjacent myocardial cells by ‘electrical synapses’ or gap junctions. They permit ‘electrical impulses’ to be conducted along the long axis of the cardiac muscle fibre. The dark lines across cardiac muscle are called intercalated discs (IDs). These discs are highly characteristic of the cardiac muscle.
AP Inter 1st Year Zoology Study Material Chapter 2 Structural Organisation in Animals LAQ Q7.3